2005 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual M - Owner Center

2005 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-7
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-16
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-36
Airbag System
......................................... 1-58
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-69
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-18
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-22
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-25
Mirrors .................................................... 2-41
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-48
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-50
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-54
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-62
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-63
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-26
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-43
M
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-60
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-64
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood ................. 5-9
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-43
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-44
Front Axle
............................................... 5-44
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-45
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-53
Tires
...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-92
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-101
Electrical System
.................................... 5-102
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-112
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index ................................................................ 1
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, HUMMER,
the name HUMMER, H2 and the H2 DESIGN are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for HUMMER whenever it appears
in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while on the road. If the vehicle is sold, leave
this manual in the vehicle.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 05H2A First Edition
ii
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 04/19/04
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5
Head Restraints .............................................1-6
Rear Seats .......................................................1-7
Heated Seats .................................................1-7
60/40 Split Bench Seat ...................................1-7
Third Row Seat (SUV) ...................................1-10
Safety Belts ...................................................1-16
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-16
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-21
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-22
Driver Position ..............................................1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-29
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-30
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-30
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults .......................................1-33
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-35
Child Restraints .............................................1-36
Older Children ..............................................1-36
Infants and Young Children ............................1-39
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-42
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-45
Top Strap ....................................................1-46
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-47
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-49
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................1-52
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-54
Airbag System ...............................................1-58
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-61
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-63
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-63
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-64
Airbag Off Switch ..........................................1-65
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-68
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-69
Restraint System Check ..................................1-69
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-69
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash ......................................................1-70
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
Horizontal Control: This control adjusts
the seat cushion.
• Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or
lowering the forward edge of the control. Raise or
lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering the
rear edge of the control.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
whole control toward the front or toward the rear of
the vehicle.
• Lower or raise the entire seat cushion by moving the
whole control up or down.
Vertical Control: This control adjusts the seatback.
Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward by
moving the control toward the rear or toward the front
of the vehicle. This adjusts the angle of the seatback.
For more information on the reclining seatbacks,
see Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-5.
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
edge of the front seats.
1-2
Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat
settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat
on page 2-63 for more information.
Power Lumbar
You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower
seatback for more lateral support.
Your vehicle’s seats have power lumbar.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the bottom
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
You can increase or
decrease lumbar support
in an area of the lower
seatback with this control,
located on the outboard
sides of the front seat(s).
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat on page 2-63 for more information.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear of
the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
1-3
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have
heated front seats. The
buttons used to control this
feature are located on the
front doors. The engine
must be running for the
heated seat feature
to work.
The low setting warms the seatback and cushion until
the seat temperature is near body temperature. The
medium and high settings heat the seatback and seat
cushion to a slightly higher temperature. You will be able
to feel heat in about two minutes.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
seatback button will glow to designate that only the
seatback is being heated. Additional presses of
the seatback button will cycle through the heat levels for
the seatback only. Press the horizontal button again
to heat the whole seat.
The heated front seats will shut off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat symbol. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium and
low and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator lights
will glow to designate the level of heat selected,
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
1-4
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle’s front seatbacks have a recline feature
which is described earlier. See Power Seats on page 1-2.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
The front head restraints can also be tilted forward in
addition to being slid up or down. To tilt either of
the front head restraints do the following:
Pull the head restraint toward you until you hear a click.
Then let go. The head restraint will stay in this position
unless you pull it forward more until another click is
heard. There are four positions available: initial position,
first click, second click, and third click. After the third
position (three clicks) is reached, pulling the head
restraint farther will release it back to the normal
upright position.
The rear head restraints can be slid up or down just
as the front head restraints, but they do not tilt.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull straight up on the head restraint to raise it and
push it down to lower it.
1-6
Rear Seats
To heat the seat, press the button to cycle through the
temperature settings of high and low. Press the
button a third time to turn the feature off. An indicator
light will glow for each heat setting when the feature
is operating.
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the buttons used
to control this feature
are located on the back of
the center console. The
engine must be running for
the heated seat feature
to work.
The heated rear seats will shut off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
60/40 Split Bench Seat
The 60/40 split bench seats can be folded to give you
more cargo space.
1-7
Folding the Seatbacks
The seatbacks (SUV only) are equipped with rearward
folding head restraints. When the seatback is being
folded down, the head restraint will automatically
fold rearward.
To fold the rear seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that nothing is under or in front
of the seat.
2. Pull up on the strap
loop located at the rear
of the seat cushion
and pull the seat
cushion up and fold
it forward.
3. Pull the seatback forward and fold it down until
it is flat.
If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes
with the cushion, try moving the front seat forward
and/or bringing the front seatback more upright.
4. Repeat the steps for the other half of the 60/40 split
bench seat.
Returning the Seats to an Upright
Position
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure
it is locked.
1-8
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To return the seat(s) to the upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all the way.
2. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position.
3. Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat
cushion to make sure the seat is securely in place.
4. Return the head restraints (SUV only) to the
upright position.
1-9
Third Row Seat (SUV)
Unfolding the Seatback
Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat
If your vehicle has a third row seat, you must fold
the second row seat down before entering or exiting the
third row. See “Folding the Seatbacks” under 60/40
Split Bench Seat on page 1-7 earlier in this section
for instructions.
The third row seatback can be folded and the entire
seat can be tilted or removed from the vehicle.
Folding the Seatback
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Pull up on the release
lever labeled 1, located
on the rear of the
seatback, and push the
seatback forward.
1-10
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure
it is locked.
To return the seatback to the passenger position, do the
following:
1. Pull up on the release
lever labeled 1 and
then pull up on
the seatback until the
seatback locks into
the upright position.
2. Push forward on the seatback to make sure it is
locked into position.
Tilting the Seat
1. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed previously.
2. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling up
on the lever labeled 2,
located on the rear
of the seat.
3. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor and push it
forward until it locks into place. You will not be able
to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the
seatback is folded down.
The seat will now remain locked in the upright position.
1-11
Returning the Seat from a Tilted to an
Upright Position
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure
it is locked.
1. Pull the lever labeled 3 toward you.
2. While still holding lever 3 toward you, grasp the top
of the seat and pull it toward you slightly.
3. Let go of lever 3 and pull the seat completely down.
4. Push down on the seat firmly. Try pulling it up to
be sure it is locked into place.
1-12
5. Pull up on the release
lever labeled 1 and
then pull up on
the seatback until the
seatback locks into
the upright position.
Removing the Seat
To remove the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Fold the seatback
forward onto the seat
cushion by using
the lever labeled 1.
The seat cannot
be removed unless the
seatback is folded.
1-13
3. To unlatch the rear of
the seat from the floor,
pull up on the release
lever labeled 2, at the
rear of the seat, and lift
the rear of the seat up
from the floor.
4. Squeeze the release handle while pulling the seat
out of the slots on the floor.
5. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
1-14
Reinstalling the Seat
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure
it is locked.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To reinstall the seat, do the following:
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
1. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the front
wheels into the slots on the floor. The front latches
should lock into place. If the latches do not lock,
try tilting the rear of the seat upward.
1-15
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
2. Once the latches are engaged, pull up on the lever
labeled 3 to allow the seat to drop into place.
3. Pull up on the lever labeled 1 to return the seatback
to its upright position.
4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
1-16
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-28.
1-17
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-18
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-19
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-20
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are supplemental
systems only; so they work with safety belts — not
instead of them. Every airbag system ever offered for
sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you
are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have to
buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and
other collisions.
1-21
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-36
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-39. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-22
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-35.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-24
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-25
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-26
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-27
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-28
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-29
Right Front Passenger Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-22.
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-30
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-35.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-31
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
1-32
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the
safety belt:
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
Comfort guides are provided for each passenger in the
second row seat and one guide for the single third
row seat. To provide added safety belt comfort
for children who have outgrown child restraints and
booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides
may be installed on the shoulder belts.
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side
of the seatback.
1-33
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-34
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-30.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses
the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. For the second row, slide the guide onto its
storage clip on the trim panel near the side of the
seatback. For the third row, slide the guide onto its
storage clip on the side of the seatback. Make sure you
remove the comfort guide from the belt before you
fold a rear seat down.
1-35
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-36
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also, see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
for Children and Small Adults on page 1-33. If the
child is sitting in the center position, move the
child toward the safety belt buckle. In either case,
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the
child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-37
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-38
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not weigh
much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-39
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-40
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-41
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-42
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
1-43
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-44
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
If you need to secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat, there is a switch on the instrument
panel that you can use to turn off the passenger’s
air bag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65 and
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position on page 1-54, for more on this including
important safety information.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger seat unless the air bag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Be sure to turn
off the airbag before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position.
Even though the airbag off switch is designed to
turn off the passenger’s airbag, no system is fail
safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
General Motors recommends that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat, even
if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-45
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-46
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed. Raise the head
restraint and route the top strap under it.
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
A child restraint with a top strap should only be used in
the second row of the SUV or SUT or in the third
row of the SUV.
Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the
right front passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top strap must be anchored. There is no place
to anchor the top strap in this position.
An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the
bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position
in the second row of the SUV or SUT and in the outboard
passenger position in the third row of the SUV.
1-47
Third Row Seat
In order to get to the anchor for the center seat in the
second row of an H2 SUT, you may need to fold
the seatback of the rear, passenger-side seat forward.
Use the following instructions.
Second Row Seats
1. Place the child restraint on the center seat.
2. Fold the rear passenger-side seatback forward.
3. Find the top strap anchor at the rear base of
the center seat and attach the top strap according to
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
1-48
{CAUTION:
4. Return the rear passenger-side seatback to its
upright position. Ensure that the seatback locks
and that the safety belt is routed properly.
5. Continue to install the child restraint according to
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure
it is locked.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. For the SUV, you
will find anchors in the center and right side seating
positions in the second row. For the SUT, you will find
anchors in the center seating position in the second row.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
1-49
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has a visible metal anchorage point in
the seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
1-50
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-49.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-46.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-49. See Top Strap
on page 1-46 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-52
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-49.
There is no top strap anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-46 if your child
restraint has one.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. There
is a switch on the instrument panel that you can
use to turn off the right front passenger’s airbag. See
Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65 for more on this,
including important safety information.
1-54
United States
Canada
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat unless the airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Be sure to turn
off the airbag before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position.
Even though the airbag off switch is designed to
turn off the passenger’s airbag, no system is fail
safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
General Motors recommends that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat, even
if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s airbag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group sit in
the right front passenger’s position
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)
until you have your vehicle serviced. See
“airbag Off Switch” for more on this, including
important safety information.
You will be using a lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1-55
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65. If your child
restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as
far back as it will go before securing the restraint in
this seat. See “Seats” in the Index. If you need
to use a rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make
sure the airbag is off once the child restraint has
been installed.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-56
If you had turned the airbag off with the switch,
remember to be sure to use the airbag off switch to turn
on the right front passenger’s airbag when you remove
the child restraint from the vehicle unless the person
who will be sitting there is a member of the passenger
airbag risk group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65.
{CAUTION:
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of an airbag. In a
crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there. Do not turn
off the passenger’s airbag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 1-65 for more on this, including
important safety information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-57
Airbag System
CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags – one airbag for the driver and
another airbag for the right front passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them.
CAUTION:
1-58
(Continued)
(Continued)
Airbags are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or
in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful airbags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection that a
child restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle. To
read how, see Older Children on page 1-36 and
Infants and Young Children on page 1-39.
There is a airbag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows
the airbag symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants.
CAUTION:
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29.
(Continued)
1-59
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level is about
9 to 17 mph (14 to 27 km/h).(The threshold level can
vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can
be somewhat above or below this range.)
1-61
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a
different crash speed than if the object does
not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
1-62
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. Inflation is determined by the angle of the
impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal
or near-frontal impacts.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road
Driving on page 4-16 for more tips on off-road driving.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger.
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But airbags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and many side impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward those
airbags. Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
1-63
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbag inflated.
Some components of the airbag module – the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, or the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s bag – will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so.
CAUTION:
1-64
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you have breathing problems but can not get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then
get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If
you experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the
airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
by using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Airbag Off Switch
Your vehicle has a switch on the instrument panel that
you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you will need some new parts for your
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-9.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
United States
Canada
system. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
airbag module in the steering wheel or both the
airbag module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag. Do not open or break
the airbag coverings.
1-65
This switch should only be turned to the off position if
the person in the right front passenger’s position is
a member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• my vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front because no space
is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
• the child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
1-66
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his or
her physician:
• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger
airbag in a crash greater than the potential
harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard
or windshield in a crash.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of an airbag. In a
crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there. Do not turn
off the passenger’s airbag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
To turn off the right front passenger’s airbag, insert your
ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the off position.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s airbag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger airbag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, do not
secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat) until you have your
vehicle serviced.
The airbag off light will come on to let you know that the
right front passenger’s airbag is off. The airbag off
light will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. The
right front passenger’s airbag will remain off until you
turn it back on again.
1-67
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
United States
Canada
To turn the right front passenger’s airbag on again,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,
and move the switch to the on position.
{CAUTION:
For up to 2 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow wires,
wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-68
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Also, the airbag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-69
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
1-70
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking .............................................2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-13
Liftgate (SUV) ..............................................2-13
Midgate (SUT) ..............................................2-14
Tailgate (SUT) ..............................................2-16
Windows ........................................................2-18
Power Windows ............................................2-19
Sun Visors ...................................................2-22
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-22
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-22
Passlock® ....................................................2-24
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-25
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-25
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-25
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-26
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-26
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-27
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-28
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-31
All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-32
Parking Brake ..............................................2-36
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-37
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-38
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-38
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-39
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-40
Mirrors ...........................................................2-41
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ....................................................2-41
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-43
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-46
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-47
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-47
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb
View Assist ..............................................2-48
OnStar® System .............................................2-48
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-50
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-51
Storage Areas ................................................2-54
Glove Box ...................................................2-54
Center Overhead Console ..............................2-54
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-55
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-55
2-2
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-59
Cargo Tie Downs (SUT) ................................2-59
All-Weather Cargo Area (SUT) ........................2-59
Tonneau Cover (SUT) ...................................2-61
Sunroof .........................................................2-62
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-63
Memory Seat ...............................................2-63
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
In an emergency contact roadside assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may be
able to have your doors unlocked automatically with the
OnStar® system if you have an active OnStar®
subscription. For more information see OnStar® System
on page 2-48.
2-4
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet
(1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
K (Unlock): Press this
button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The
interior lamps will come
on. Pressing unlock again
within three seconds
will cause the remaining
doors to unlock.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
You can choose different feedback options for each press
of the unlock button. See “Lock Feedback” and “Unlock
Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-54 for more information.
2-5
Q (Lock):
Press this button once to lock all of the
doors. Pressing lock again within three seconds may
cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation. You can
choose different feedback options for each press of the
lock button. See “Lock Feedback” and “Unlock Feedback”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-54 for more
information.
L (Panic): Press this button to sound the horn and
flash the headlamps and taillamps for up to 30 seconds.
Panic can be turned off by pressing the button again, by
waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent
another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
2-6
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,
do the following:
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this system. The transmitter
does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The
receiver will not respond to a signal that has been
sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording
and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the lock and unlock
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for
15 seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, in the slot
between the covers of the transmitter housing near
the key ring hole. Remove the bottom by twisting
the coin.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+)
side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter. See
“Resynchronization” following this information.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To unlock the door from the outside, use the keyless
entry system or the key.
To unlock or lock the door
from the inside, slide the
manual lever forward
or rearward.
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s armrests.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate
(if equipped) is open, the delayed locking feature
will delay locking the doors until five seconds after the
last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to
signal that the delayed locking feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the
keyless entry transmitter twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on
again by doing the following:
Q (Lock):
Remove the ignition key and press the lock
symbol to lock all of the doors.
If the delayed locking feature is on, the doors will not
lock until five seconds after the last door is closed. Press
the lock symbol twice to override this feature and lock
all of the doors immediately. See Delayed Locking
on page 2-9 for more information.
K (Unlock):
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
2. Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can also program this feature using the DIC.
See “Door Lock Delay” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-54.
To unlock the doors, press the unlock
symbol.
2-9
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-54
for more information on DIC programming.
Programmable Locking Feature
The following two modes are available programming
options:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
out of PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The following instructions tell you how to change
the automatic door lock mode. Choose one of the
two programming options listed above before entering
the program mode. To enter the program mode, do
the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2-10
2. Turn the key to RUN then back to LOCK twice.
Then, with the key in LOCK, release the turn
signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this, the
doors will lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice,
and a 30-second timer will begin. You are now
ready to program the automatic door lock feature.
3. Press the lock side of the power lock switch once.
You will hear either one or two chimes. The number
of chimes tells you which lock mode is currently
selected. Continue to press the door lock switch until
the number of chimes that you hear matches the
number of the mode that you want. If you take longer
than 30 seconds, the locks will automatically lock
and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate
that you have left the program mode. If this occurs,
you can repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1
to re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the doors will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming mode,
the current automatic settings will not be modified.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The following instructions tell you how to change the
automatic door unlock mode. Choose one of the
four programming options listed above before entering
the program mode. To enter the program mode, do
the following:
3. Press the unlock side of the power lock switch once.
You will hear one, two, three, or four chimes. The
number of chimes tells you which unlock mode is
currently selected. Continue to press the door unlock
switch until the number of chimes that you hear
matches the number of the mode that you want. If
you take longer than 30 seconds, the locks will
automatically lock and unlock and the horn will
chirp twice to indicate that you have left the
program mode. If this occurs, you can repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the doors will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming mode,
the current automatic settings will not be modified.
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, the doors will lock and
unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a 30-second
timer will begin. You are now ready to program the
automatic door unlock feature.
2-11
Rear Door Security Locks
2. Turn the lock
counterclockwise with
your ignition key.
With this feature, you can lock the rear doors so they
cannot be opened from the inside.
This feature is located on
the inside edge of the rear
doors.
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same to the other rear door.
To use the security locks, do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2-12
If you want to open the rear door while the security lock
is engaged, unlock and open the door from the
outside.
To disengage the child security lock feature, turn the
lock clockwise with your ignition key.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
Liftgate (SUV)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-19.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-39.
To unlock the liftgate, press the unlock button on any of
the power door lock switches or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Open the liftgate by pulling the handle located in the
center of the door.
To lock the liftgate, press the lock button on any of the
power door lock switches or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
2-13
Midgate (SUT)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the cargo
area covered and the tailgate and the midgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the cargo
covers on and the tailgate and midgate open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the midgate:
• Make sure all windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed on the setting
that brings in outside air. This will force
outside air into your vehicle. See Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on
page 3-19.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-39.
2-14
The midgate allows you to extend the length of your
vehicle’s cargo area into the cab.
Lowering the Midgate
The midgate window must be completely lowered for
the midgate to be lowered. See ”Midgate Window” under
Power Windows on page 2-19.
Both the midgate and the midgate window can be
lowered while the ignition is in either RUN or
ACCESSORY, or while in Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) mode. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 2-26 for more information.
To lower the midgate, do the following:
1. Fold the rear seats forward. See 60/40 Split Bench
Seat on page 1-7. The front seats may have to be
moved forward slightly.
2.
K: Press the bottom part of this switch to
lower the midgate window. See Instrument
Panel Overview on page 3-4 for the location of this
switch. The window can also be operated using
the global express-down button. See “Global Glass
Feature” under Power Windows on page 2-19.
4. Pull the midgate inward and down to its fully
lowered position.
5. Flip the auxiliary panel on the top of the midgate
into position to bridge the gap created by the
hinges in the midgate. There are two finger holds
on the panel.
Raising the Midgate
To raise the midgate, do the following:
1. Fold the auxiliary panel back into the exterior of the
midgate. The panel should snap loudly back into
position which means it is secure.
3. Press either one of the two power midgate latch
release buttons. The midgate will move slightly
forward from its closed position. The latch release
buttons operate while the ignition is in RUN,
ACCESSORY, in RAP mode, or up to ten minutes
after removing the key. If necessary, press the
global express-down button to reactivate the release
buttons for an additional ten minutes.
2. Reverse the steps for lowering the midgate listed
previously. The midgate must be fully latched on
both sides before the window can be raised.
3. Press the top part of the midgate window switch to
express-up the window. To stop the window, press
the switch a second time.
2-15
Tailgate (SUT)
Before you can open the tailgate, you must first move
the spare tire carrier out of the way. To do this,
follow these steps:
1. Lift the latch located on the left side of the tire
carrier to release it.
{CAUTION:
Make sure the tire and carrier are secure.
Driving with the tire or carrier unlatched could
injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle.
2-16
2. Swing the tire carrier to the side.
3. Open the tailgate by lifting the release handle while
pulling the tailgate toward you.
To close the tailgate, do the following:
1. Swing the tailgate up until it latches firmly into
place.
2. Move the spare tire carrier back into place until it
latches.
3. Pull on the spare tire carrier to make sure it is firmly
latched.
2-17
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-18
Power Windows
Express-Down Windows
The driver’s and front passenger’s window switches
have an express-down feature which allows the window
to be lowered fully without continuously pressing the
switch. Press the front of the window switch down all the
way and release. Express-down can be interrupted at
any time by pulling up the front of the switch.
Window Lockout
o: Press the lockout button to prevent passengers
from operating their windows. The lockout button
is located near the power window switches on the
driver’s door. A light in the lockout button will come on
to show that lockout has been activated. Press the
lockout button again to return to normal operation.
A power window switch is located on the armrest of
each side door. The switches operate while the ignition
is in RUN or ACCESSORY or while Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-26.
The driver’s door also has a switch for each of the
passenger’s windows.
Press the front of the switch to the first position to lower
the window to the desired level. Pull up the front of
the switch to raise the window.
2-19
Global Window Feature
The global window up and
express-down buttons are
located on the driver’s door.
This feature allows all side windows and midgate
window, if equipped, to be opened or closed at the
same time.
q:
Press the express-down button to lower all side
windows and midgate window, if equipped, without
stopping. Express-down will operate while the ignition is
in RUN or ACCESSORY, or while Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-26.
2-20
If the key is out of the ignition, express-down will only
activate while the driver’s door is open and the content
theft-deterrent system is disabled. To stop the
express-down, press the up button.
Pressing the global express-down button also activates
the power midgate latch release buttons, if equipped.
See”Lowering the Midgate” under Midgate (SUT)
on page 2-14
n: Press the up button to raise all windows. The
midgate window, if equipped, will express-up while the
side windows will go up a small amount at a time.
Press and hold the up button to raise the four side
windows all the way. The up button operates while the
ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY, or while RAP is
active.
Midgate Window
If your vehicle has a midgate, the switch to operate the
window is located on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel. See Instrument Panel Overview
on page 3-4.
K: Press the bottom of the switch to express-down the
window. Press the top of the switch to express-up the
window. Press the top or bottom of the switch a second
time to stop the window.
The window switch will operate while the ignition is in
RUN or ACCESSORY, or while Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-26.
The window can also be operated using the global
window buttons. See “Global Window Feature”
previously.
{CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the midgate
window will not reverse automatically. You or
others could be injured and the window could
be damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions are
clear of the midgate window path.
Midgate Window Express Override Mode
If window movement is stopped, either by an obstruction
or weather conditions such as severe icing, auto-reversal
to a partially open position will occur. The midgate
window function will return to normal operation once the
obstruction or condition is removed.
If you override this function and activate express
override mode, window express functions are disabled.
In this mode, the window can only be operated
manually by pressing and holding the midgate window
switch or the global window button within two seconds
after the midgate window has stopped at a partially open
position. The express override mode can only be
activated immediately following a window auto-reversal.
Midgate Window Error/Jog Mode
If the midgate window has detected abnormal operating
conditions which may lead to system damage or
malfunction, the midgate window will automatically go
into Error/Jog mode. In this mode, window express
functions are disabled and the window can only
be operated manually by pressing the midgate window
switch or the global window button. The window will
move slightly and stop. Press and hold the window
switch or global window button to continue to close the
window a small amount at a time.
2-21
To Exit Error/Jog Mode
1. Ensure normal midgate window operating conditions
have been resumed.
2. Press and hold the midgate window down switch
approximately one second to engage window
express-down.
3. Release the window down switch and allow the
window to fully open.
Do not activate any window function switches once
glass movement has been initiated.
4. Press the midgate glass up switch and visually
confirm that the express-up has been accomplished.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them out to help block glare at the
front and side windows.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull the sunvisor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps.
2-22
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
With this system, the
security light in the
instrument panel cluster will
flash as you open the door
if your ignition is off.
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn
off to save the battery power. You can choose different
feedback options for the alarm. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual
door lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if
the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with
the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm
won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
2-23
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-103 and
Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-107.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
Passlock®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
2-24
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this
time. You may also want to check the fuse. See
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-103 and
Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-107. See your dealer
for service.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-68 for more information.
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
2-25
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as the
radio in the accessory ignition position may drain the
battery and prevent your vehicle from starting. Do not
operate your vehicle in the accessory ignition
position for a long period of time.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature will allow
certain features on your vehicle to continue to work
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to
LOCK or until one of the doors is opened.
Starting Your Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with Starter Motor Control. This
feature assists in starting the engine and protects the
electrical system. This feature may cause the engine to
crank even after the ignition key is not in START.
2-26
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will disengage the starter
motor, cause your battery to be drained much
sooner, and add excessive heat that can damage
your starter motor. Try not to hold the key in START
for longer than 15 seconds and wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather (below
0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have an
internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This will
prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when
the temperature is at or above 0°F (-18°C) as noted on
the cord.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
2-27
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Locate the electrical cord near the front recovery
loop on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
2-28
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission
and features an electronic shift position indicator
located within the instrument panel cluster.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your drive wheels. It
is the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Your vehicle will be free to roll — even if your
shift lever is in PARK (P) — if your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See
Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-37.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-37. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-68.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-52.
2-29
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the drive wheels. To restart when you
are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-30
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmission
will drive in second gear. You may use this feature
for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are
trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery
road surfaces. Once the vehicle is moving, shift into
DRIVE (D).
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission will not shift into first gear
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Tow/Haul Mode
Your vehicle is equipped
with a tow/haul mode. The
button is located on the
instrument panel to the
right of the steering wheel.
You can use this feature to assist when towing or
hauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-68 for more information.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder, your
transmission is designed to shift differently until the
engine reaches normal operating temperature. This is
intended to improve heater performance.
2-31
All-Wheel Drive
You can choose between four modes:
All-wheel drive sends your engine’s driving power to all
four wheels for extra traction. To get the most out of
all-wheel drive, you must be familiar with its operation.
Notice: Driving on pavement in 4HI Lock or
4LO Lock for extended periods may cause
premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain and
tires. Do not drive in 4HI Lock or 4LO Lock on
pavement for extended periods.
Transfer Case Buttons
The transfer case buttons
are located to the right of
the instrument panel
cluster. Use these switches
to shift into and out of the
different all-wheel drive
modes.
2-32
G (4HI):
This setting is used for driving in most street
and highway situations. You can also use this setting for
light or variable off-road conditions.
H (4HI Lock): Use this mode when you need extra
traction in most off-road situations such as sand, mud,
snow or level, rocky trails.
I(4LO Lock): This mode delivers extra torque to all
four wheels and is used for extreme off-road conditions.
You might choose 4LO Lock if you are driving off-road,
deep sand, mud, or snow and climbing or descending
steep hills.
When in this mode you can also choose to lock the rear
axle for additional traction in extreme off-road situations.
See Locking Rear Axle on page 4-10.
Notice: Operating your vehicle in 4LO Lock above
50 mph (80 km/h) for any extended period of time
could cause damage to the transfer case. Do
not operate your vehicle in 4LO Lock above 50 mph
(80 km/h) for extended periods.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on
page 2-36.
If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
4WD message” under Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-43.
Shifting into 4HI or 4HI Lock
With the vehicle traveling less than 40 mph (64 km/h),
press and release the 4HI or 4HI Lock button. The
indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain lit
when the shift is complete.
It may be necessary to drive backwards for a short
distance of 25 feet (7.5 m) to get the lock feature
to disengage.
N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-64 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-64 for more information.
Indicator lights in the buttons show which mode you are
in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you
turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do
not come on, you should take your vehicle to your
dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while
shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when
the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer
case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the
last chosen setting.
2-33
Shifting into 4LO Lock
Shifting Out of 4LO Lock
To shift into 4LO Lock, the ignition must be in RUN and
the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have
your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press
and release the 4LO Lock button. You must wait for
the 4LO Lock indicator light to stop flashing and remain
lit before shifting your transmission in gear.
To shift from 4LO Lock to 4HI or 4HI Lock, your vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h)
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in
RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO
Lock is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI or 4HI Lock
button. You must wait for the 4HI or 4HI Lock indicator
light to stop flashing and remain lit before shifting your
transmission into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the indicator light stops flashing could cause
damage to the transfer case. Always wait until the
indicator light stops flashing before putting the
transmission back in gear.
It is normal for your vehicle to have engagement noise
and bump when shifting between 4LO and 4HI
ranges or from NEUTRAL with the engine running.
If the 4LO Lock button is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO Lock indicator light will flash
for 15 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 15 seconds the
transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
2-34
It is normal for your vehicle to have engagement noise
and bump when shifting between 4LO and 4HI
ranges or from NEUTRAL with the engine running.
If the 4HI or 4HI Lock button is pressed when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI or 4HI Lock
indicator light will flash for 15 seconds but will not
complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less
than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the indicator light stops flashing could cause
damage to the transfer case. Always wait until the
indicator light stops flashing before putting the
transmission back in gear.
Shifting into NEUTRAL
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, do the following:
To shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL, do the
following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
4. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
5. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
6. Shift the transfer case to 4HI.
7. Simultaneously press and hold the 4HI and
4LO Lock buttons for 10 seconds. The red
NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case
shift to NEUTRAL is complete.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (4HI, 4HI Lock or 4LO Lock).
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the red light will go out.
5. You may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the indicator light stops flashing could cause
damage to the transfer case. Always wait until the
indicator light stops flashing before putting the
transmission back in gear.
2-35
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least
three seconds.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-68.
2-36
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-68.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing and
holding the button on the end of the shift lever and
moving the lever forward as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-37
Torque Lock
Parking Over Things That Burn
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-37.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-28.
2-38
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
•
•
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
CAUTION:
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Repairs were not done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
2-39
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-39.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-48.
2-40
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
All-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
NEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-37.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-68.
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
For information on the OnStar® system see OnStar®
System on page 2-48 or consult the OnStar® manual.
The automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror includes a compass reading and outside
temperature display in the upper right corner of
the mirror. The dual display can be turned on or off by
pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button.
Temperature Display
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Press the TEMP button once briefly to
toggle the temperature reading on and off. To alternate
the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and
Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button for
approximately four seconds until the display blinks F
and C. Press and release the TEMP button to toggle
between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. After
about four seconds of inactivity, the display will
stop blinking and display the last selection made.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time (30 minutes), see your GM
dealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press and hold the TEMP button for about eight seconds
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The
indicator light to the right of the TEMP button will turn on
or off to show when the automatic dimming feature is
activated. Once the mirror is turned off, it will remain off
until it is turned back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
2-41
Compass Operation
Press the COMP button briefly to turn the compass on
or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After about five seconds, the display does not show
a compass heading (N for North, for example),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference may be caused
by a magnetic antenna mount, a magnetic note pad
holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
2-42
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the COMP button for about eight seconds or until
CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until a direction is
displayed.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the compass
could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
The automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level
to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror includes a compass reading and outside
temperature display in the upper right corner of
the mirror. The dual display can be turned on or off by
pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button.
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-43
Temperature Display
Compass Operation
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Press the TEMP button once briefly to
toggle the temperature reading on and off. To alternate
the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and
Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button for
approximately four seconds until the display blinks F
and C. Press and release the TEMP button to toggle
between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. After
about four seconds of inactivity, the display will
stop blinking and display the last selection made.
Press the COMP button briefly to turn the compass on
or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time (30 minutes), see your GM
dealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press and hold the TEMP button for about eight seconds
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The
indicator light to the right of the TEMP button will turn on
or off to show when the automatic dimming feature is
activated. Once the mirror is turned off, it will remain off
until it is turned back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
2-44
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After about five seconds, the display does not show
a compass heading (N for North, for example),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference may be caused
by a magnetic antenna mount, a magnetic note pad
holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the COMP button for about eight seconds or until
CAL is displayed.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until a direction is
displayed.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the compass
could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance.
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-45
Cleaning the Mirror
Power Folding Mirrors
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror.
To fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch,
located above the mirror control, to the middle
position. The mirror control will illuminate. Press the
right or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold the
mirrors. The mirror will adjust as it folds in and will
reposition itself once it is unfolded.
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, the mirrors need to be reset. See “Resetting
the Power Folding Mirrors” next.
Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors
The power folding mirrors will need to be reset if:
• They are accidently manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
Move the upper selector switch to the left or right to
choose the mirror to be adjusted, then press the dots,
located below the selector switch on the four-way control
pad, to adjust the direction of each mirror.
The mirrors may also include a memory function which
works in conjunction with the memory seats. See
Memory Seat on page 2-63 for more information.
2-46
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold them
at least three times using the mirror controls. This will
reset them to their normal detent position.
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It makes things in the mirror appear
farther away than they really are.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If the vehicle has heated
mirrors, the button to turn
this function on or off
is located on the climate
control panel.
Press this button to warm the driver’s and passenger’s
outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice,
snow, and condensation.
If the vehicle has a rear window defogger, the heated
mirrors will come on when this button is pressed.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-19 for more
information.
2-47
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
with Curb View Assist
If the vehicle has this feature, the driver’s outside mirror
adjusts for the glare of the headlamps behind you.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass
and Temperature Display on page 2-43.
The vehicle’s outside mirrors can also perform a curb
view assist mirror function. This causes the passenger’s
and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This feature may
be useful in viewing the curb when parallel parking.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a
short delay has occurred, the passenger’s and/or
driver’s mirror will return to its original position.
To change the preselected tilt position, adjust the
mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory as
the tilt position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver
Information Center. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-43 for more information.
2-48
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com
or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.
OnStar® Services
The Safe and Sound Plan is included on new vehicles
for the first year. You can upgrade to the Directions and
Connections Plan or extend the OnStar® service plan
that best meets your needs. For more information, press
the OnStar® button to speak to an advisor.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is a hands-free wireless phone that’ is
integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed
nationwide using simple voice commands with no
additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,
refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;
or speak to an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment, and more. You are
also able to listen and reply to E-mail through the
vehicle’s audio system. Customize your information
profile at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s
guide for more information.
2-49
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
HomeLink® Transmitter
A steering wheel control can be used to interact with the
OnStar® system.
Press the control with this
symbol on the steering
wheel to place an OnStar®
call or make a phone call.
Press the control to dial menu choices when calling into
voice mail systems, or to dial directory numbers.
Press the control, say the number (s), then say “dial”.
HomeLink® a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-50
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Programming HomeLink®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
2-51
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
2-52
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” Do not
repeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink® ” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink® ”
to complete.
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this
section.
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” following this section.
2-53
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
Storage Areas
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
Glove Box
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Do
not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section.
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle
upward. Close the glove box with a firm push.
Center Overhead Console
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
Your vehicle is equipped with either a short or long
overhead console.
2-54
To open a door on the console, push on the rear edge
of the door and let it swing open. Push the door up
until it latches to close the door.
The overhead consoles also includes reading lamps, the
HomeLink transmitter buttons and the sunroof switch
(if equipped).
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle has a console compartment between the
bucket seats.
To open it, press the button on the side of the console
and swing the console lid open.
Luggage Carrier
For the SUT the luggage carrier consists of siderails
that run the length of the roof and the cargo area. The
crossrails attach into the siderails and can be moved
back and forth (fore and aft) to accommodate securing
various cargo sizes.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 300 lbs. (136 kg) or hangs
over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage
your vehicle. Load cargo only on top of the
crossrails and tie the cargo down to the crossrail
support cargo tie-down loops, making sure to fasten
it securely.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-58.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can load cargo on
your vehicle.
For the SUV the luggage carrier consists of siderails
attached to the roof. The crossrails attach into the
siderails and can be moved back and forth (fore and aft)
to accommodate securing various cargo sizes.
2-55
Adjusting the Crossrails
Adjust the crossrails to fit your load by doing the
following:
3. Tighten the lock knobs and then try to move the
crossrails back and forth to be sure that they do
not move.
4. Once you load the cargo onto the crossrails, secure
it by tying it down to the crossrail support cargo
tie-down loops. Do not load cargo directly on
the roof of your vehicle.
Be sure you do not cover the roof marker lamps or
the Center-High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
(If equipped) with cargo.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo check now and
then to make sure the luggage and cargo are still
securely fastened and the crossrails are tight.
1. Loosen the lock knobs on the crossrail supports by
turning the knobs counterclockwise. Only loosen
them enough to allow the crossrails to slide easily.
2. Slide the crossrails to the desired position, being
sure to align the lines in the side rails with the
arrows on the crossrail supports.
2-56
Stop Tabs
Vehicles with the off-road lamps will have additional
stop tabs placed in the siderails to prevent you
from moving the lamps too far rearward, causing them
to shine into the optional sunroof opening.
Crossrail Channels
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for any roof-mounted accessories (such
as off-road lamps or a roof basket) on your vehicle,
you can damage your vehicle. To avoid damaging
your vehicle in a car wash, remove any
roof-mounted accessories if you can, and do not
use an automatic car wash while roof-mounted
accessories are on your vehicle. See Washing Your
Vehicle on page 5-96 for more information.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, it will have a crossrail
stop tab placed in the siderail in the spot labeled
SUN—ROOF STOP. This tab prevents you from moving
the crossrails past the opening of the sunroof and
loading cargo too far forward.
The crossrails have built in channels to allow you to
attach other items designed for this system, such
as basket luggage carriers, bike racks, ski racks, etc.
Your vehicle will also have a stop tab in the crossrail in
the spot labeled ON STAR STOP. This tab prevents
loading cargo too close to the OnStar antenna which will
cause the OnStar and navigation system (if equipped)
to function improperly or not at all.
2-57
To use the crossrail channels, do the following:
2. Pull the end cap
straight out from the
crossrail.
3. Peel back the rub strip from the crossrail.
1. Use the included key to unlock the crossrail end
cap by turning it counterclockwise. If you ever
lose a key, your dealer will be able to help
you obtain a replacement.
4. Slide the accessory you are using into the crossrail
channel and secure it as the accessory instructions
direct.
5. Place the crossrail endcap back on and lock it with
the key.
You will not be using the rub strip when using crossrail
accessories. When you remove any crossrail
accessory, be sure to reinstall the rub strip. To do this,
press the rub strip in place until it seats into the
channel of the crossrail.
2-58
Rear Seat Armrest
All-Weather Cargo Area (SUT)
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear armrest/cupholder.
Your vehicle is equipped with features to help it resist
the elements and protect cargo inside the cargo area.
To open it, pull up and then out on the tab, located at the
top center of the armrest, and pull the armrest down.
Cargo Tie Downs (SUT)
There are four oval shaped openings (A) in the cargo
bed that allow access to four tie downs. You can
use these tie downs to secure cargo.
Even when the water management system is working
properly and the cover system is on, there may be some
instances (heavy rains, automated car washes, etc.)
when water may be present in the following areas:
A. Drain Hole
2-59
Removal and Cleaning
Cargo Area Floor Drains
To ensure that the water management system performs
properly, be sure that the midgate, tailgate and cover
system are fully closed and that each element of
the water management system is clean and not blocked
with debris. Follow the instruction given next in this
section for the proper procedures on cleaning each item
of the water management system.
Side Rail Channels
The side rail channels are located on top of both sides
of the roof and the cargo area. You may want to
flush them out with clean water if you notice any debris
collecting inside of them.
When loading cargo into the cargo area, be careful not
to damage the rails.
For more information on this feature see Luggage
Carrier on page 2-55
2-60
Your vehicle also has four cargo-area floor drains (a)
located under the cargo mat, if equipped, near the sides
of the cargo area. These drains should be cleaned
periodically to allow water to exit the cargo area.
The cargo mat has cutouts for the drains. You can flush
the drains through the cutouts, but if the cargo area
is extremely dirty you can lift up the edges of the cargo
floor mat or take the whole mat out and flush the
drains with water.
Tonneau Cover (SUT)
{CAUTION:
If you remove the tonneau cover, do not store it
in the vehicle without securing it to the vehicle.
An improperly stored tonneau cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. When you put the cover back on,
always be sure that it is securely reattached.
Your vehicle may have a hard tonneau cover, you can
use it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Your tonneau cover will have two lock cylinders on it.
One lock cylinder is to secure the cover closed and
the other lock cylinder will allow you to secure the
tailgate close.
2-61
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a power sliding sunroof. To
operate it, the ignition or RAP must be in the ON
position. The switch used to operate the sunroof is
located in the overhead console.
You will be able to open the cover by turning the cover
release latch in a clockwise direction, which will allow
you to lift the cover with the assistance of the struts.
The sunroof has five positions:
• First open stop: To open the sunroof and sunshade,
press the rear of the switch until the sunroof reaches
the first open stop then release the switch. For more
information on using the sunshade, see “Sunshade
Operation” later in this section.
• Second open stop: To open the sunroof further,
press the rear of the switch until the sunroof reaches
the second open stop then release the switch.
2-62
• Fully open: To open the sunroof completely, press
and hold the rear of the switch until the sunroof
opens completely.
• Closed: To close the sunroof, press the front of the
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position
or until it is fully closed and stops on its own.
• Vent: The vent position allows the rear of the sunroof
to be opened and tilted upward. With the sunroof in
the fully closed position, press and hold the front of
the switch until the sunroof reaches the desired vent
position or until it stops moving. To close the sunroof
from the vent position, press and hold the rear of the
switch until the sunroof is fully closed.
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls for the
memory function are
located on the driver’s door.
Do not to leave the sunroof open for long periods of
time as debris may collect in the tracks.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade will open automatically when opening
the sunroof.
However, it can manually be pulled shut after the
sunroof is closed. To adjust the sunshade, push it
backward or pull it forward to the desired position. The
sunshade cannot be adjusted further than the current
closed position of the sunroof.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seat and both the driver’s
and passenger’s outside mirrors. The settings for these
features can be saved for up to two drivers.
2-63
To store the memory settings, do the following:
1. While the vehicle is in PARK (P), adjust the driver’s
seat, including the seatback recliner, lumbar, and
side wing area, and both outside mirrors to
your preference.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has been
stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The controls for this memory function are located on the
driver’s door.
B (Easy Exit Seat):
This button is used to program
and recall the desired driver’s seat position when
exiting/entering the vehicle. The seat position can be
saved for up to two drivers.
2-64
To store the seat exit position, do the following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button. The seat will
move to the stored memory position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored
for the selected button 1 or 2.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow
the preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:
• Press the exit button on the memory control.
• Or, if this feature is activated in the DIC, removing
the key from the ignition will move the seat to the
exit position.
See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-54 for more information on activating this
feature in the DIC.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps ................................3-14
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15
Off-Road Lamps ...........................................3-16
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-17
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-17
Reading Lamps ............................................3-17
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-17
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-18
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter .........................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-25
Climate Controls Personalization .....................3-25
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-26
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-27
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-28
Tachometer .................................................3-28
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-28
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-29
Airbag Off Light ............................................3-30
Charging System Light ..................................3-31
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-32
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-32
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-34
Traction Off Light ..........................................3-34
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35
Transmission Temperature Gage .....................3-35
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-37
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-40
Security Light ...............................................3-41
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-41
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-41
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-42
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-42
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-43
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-43
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-44
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-47
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-54
Audio System(s) .............................................3-60
Setting the Time ...........................................3-61
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-61
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-74
3-2
Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-87
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-87
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-89
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-89
Radio Reception ...........................................3-90
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-91
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-92
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-92
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-92
Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-92
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-25.
B. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps
on page 3-13.
C. OnStar® and Radio Steering Wheel Buttons (If
Equipped). See OnStar® System on page 2-48 and
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-89.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-27.
E. Locking Rear Axle and All-wheel Drive Buttons. See
Locking Rear Axle on page 4-10 and All-Wheel
Drive on page 2-32.
F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-60.
G. Airbag Switch. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65.
H. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-54.
I. Midgate Glass Up/Down Switch (SUT). See Midgate
(SUT) on page 2-14. Rear Wiper/Washer Switch
(SUV). See Windshield Washer on page 3-9.
J. Dome Override Button. See Dome Lamps on
page 3-17.
K. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
L. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
M. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
N. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake on
page 2-36.
O. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
P. Tow/Haul Selector Button. See Tow/Haul Mode Light
on page 3-42.
Q. Ride Height Selector Button (If Equipped). See
Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height on page 4-65.
R. Cigarette Lighter or Accessory Power Outlet (If
Equipped). See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-18 Accessory Power Outlets on page 3-18.
S. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-28.
T. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlets on page 3-18.
U. OnStar Buttons. See OnStar® System on page 2-48.
V. Rear Window Defogger Button. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 3-19.
W. Comfort Control System. See Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-19.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press the vehicle’s steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
top of the steering
column.
Tilt Wheel
The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit
the vehicle.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
3-6
The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of the steering
column under the turn signal lever.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you
release it.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
G Turn and Lane Change Signals
3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Flash-to-Pass Feature
NQ Windshield Wipers
J Windshield Washer
I Cruise Control
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
3-7
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-103
and Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-107.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message
off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the
lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
3-8
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
L(Washer Fluid):
8(Mist):
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
N(Delay):
You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings.
There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
1 (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9(Off):
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-9
Rear Window Washer/Wiper (SUV)
Cruise Control
If your vehicle has a rear
window washer/wiper, this
knob is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob to either 1 or 2.
For long delayed wiping, turn the knob to 1. For short
delayed wiping, turn the knob to 2
9(Off):
To turn the wiper off, turn the knob to this
symbol.
=(Washer Fluid):
To wash the window, press the
knob with this symbol.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
windows, check the fluid level.
3-10
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
R(On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T(Set):
Press this button to set the speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
3-11
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
3-12
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to turn off the cruise control:
•
•
•
•
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
move the cruise control switch to off, or
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
If road conditions cause the traction control system
to activate, cruise control will turn off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
• If the accelerator pedal is held for 60 seconds or
longer, cruise control will turn off.
Erasing Speed Memory
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
9(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn off all
exterior lamps including the DRLs. To turn any
lamps back on when in the off mode, turn the knob to
the desired lamp mode.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-13
AUTO: Turn the control to this position to put the
system into automatic headlamp mode. The Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) will also be activated if it is light
enough outside.
;(Parking Lamps):
Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Roof Marker Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2(Headlamps):
Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in
AUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain on
for a set time. You can change this delay time using the
DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
You can switch your headlamps from low to high-beam
by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel.
3-14
Headlamps on Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when
your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned
on and your key is out of the ignition. To turn off
the chime, turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and
then back on. In the AUTO mode, the headlamps
turn off once the ignition is in LOCK or may remain on
until the exit delay ends (if enabled in the DIC).
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamps control is in AUTO,
the transmission is not in PARK (P), and
the light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp
switch is in AUTO, your automatic headlamp system will
turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 3-16.
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
3-15
Off-Road Lamps
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for any roof-mounted accessories (such
as off-road lamps or a roof basket) on your vehicle,
you can damage your vehicle. To avoid damaging
your vehicle in a car wash, remove any
roof-mounted accessories if you can, and do not
use an automatic car wash while roof-mounted
accessories are on your vehicle. See Washing Your
Vehicle on page 5-96 for more information.
The off-road lamps, if equipped, provide auxiliary
lighting when your vehicle is used off road. These lamps
are not intended to be used in conjunction with, or in
place of, existing vehicle lighting. The lamps are not to
be used on any public street or highway and are to
be covered when not in use. Check your state and local
laws before installing or using any auxiliary lighting.
In some states it may be necessary to remove the roof
lamps when operating the vehicle on the highway.
The button for the off-road lamps is located in the
overhead console.
To use the lamps, be sure the engine is running.
Remove the covers from the lamps and press the button
to turn them on. Press the button again to turn them
off. An indicator light will glow near the button when the
lamps are on.
3-16
Notice: Turning on the off-road lamps before
removing the lamp covers could damage the
off-road lamps and the covers. Always return the
lamps to the upright position and remove the covers
before turning on the off-road lamps.
The off-road lamps will remain on even after the ignition
is turned off. The off-road lamps button must be
pressed to turn them off.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel
lights and the radio display. This will only work if
the headlamps or parking lamps are on.
To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the thumbwheel all the way up.
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door or
the midgate, if equipped, and will turn off when all
doors or midgate are closed.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamp control, all
the way up. In this position, the dome lamps will
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
E (Dome Override):
Press this button, located below
the exterior lamp control, to turn dome lamps off even
while a door is opened. To return the lamps to automatic
operation, press the button again and it will return to
the out position. In this position, the dome lamps
will come on when you open a door.
Entry/Exit Lighting
Your vehicle has reading lamps located in the overhead
console. Press the button located next to the lamp to
turn it on. The lamps can be adjusted to point in
the direction you want.
Press the button again to turn the lamp off.
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry/exit
feature.
These lamps will also come on with the dome lamps.
When a door is opened or the key is removed from the
ignition, the dome lamps will come on if the dome
override button is in the out position.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on
for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in lock.
This will keep your battery from running down.
3-17
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle may be equipped with up to five accessory
power outlets. The two front outlets, if equipped, are
located under the OnStar® buttons on the instrument
panel behind hinged doors.
The two middle outlets, if equipped, are located on the
back of the center console.
There may also be an outlet located in the rear of the
vehicle near the liftgate. Remove the cap to use the
outlet. Replace the cap when the outlet is not in use.
If your vehicle is the SUT model, there is an outlet in the
rear cargo area on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your dealer
before adding electrical equipment.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to
the accessory power outlets and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer for additional information on the
accessory power plugs.
3-18
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
If your vehicle has an ashtray, it is removable and fits into
the front cupholder. Pull up on the ashtray door to open it.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the console. To
reinstall the ashtray, slide it back to the original position.
To use the cigarette lighter, if equipped, push it in all the
way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by
itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
anything other than the cigarette lighter in the
heating element.
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle.
will always flow through the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the driver will be displayed under
and to the left of the temperature setting.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob
The passenger’s side knob can be used to change the
temperature of the air coming through the system on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature can be
adjusted even if the system is turned off. This is possible
since outside air will always flow through the system as
the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to
recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this
section.
You can select different climate control settings for the
driver and passengers.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
of the air coming through the system on the driver’s
side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the
system is turned off. This is possible since outside air
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the passenger will be displayed
under and to the right of the temperature setting.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing and
holding the AUTO button for four seconds. Both the
driver and passenger arrows will be displayed.
3-19
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature, the
air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current driver’s set temperature, delivery
mode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button again
within five seconds to display the passenger’s set
temperature.
If the driver and passenger’s temperature settings
are not the same, the opposite side temperature
setting will be displayed for an additional five
seconds. To make the passenger’s temperature the
same as the driver’s press and hold the AUTO
button for about four seconds.
When auto is selected, the air conditioning operation
and air inlet will be automatically controlled. The
air conditioning compressor will run when the
outside temperature is over about 40°F (4°C). The
air inlet will normally be set to outside air. If it’s
hot outside, the air inlet may automatically switch to
recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down
your vehicle. The light on the button will illuminate
in recirculation.
3-20
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C)
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This
sensor regulates air temperature based on sun
load, and also turns on your headlamps.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the
system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is
available. The length of delay depends on the
engine coolant temperature. Pressing the fan switch
will override this delay and change the fan to a
selected speed.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the up
or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, the
AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
H (Panel):
Manual Operation
- (Defog):
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan
speed.
this section.
w9x (Fan):
The switch with the fan symbol allows
you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up
arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow
to decrease fan speed.
Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the
system on.
C (Mode):
Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
If you press the mode button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air mode delivery. The display will then show the
current status of the system. When the system is turned
off, the display will go blank after displaying the
current status of the system.
This setting will deliver air to the
instrument panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level):
This setting will deliver warmer air to the
floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
6 (Floor):
This setting will deliver air to the floor
outlets.
See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
@(Recirculation):
Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light on
the recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when you
are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for
maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.
Press this button again to allow outside air to enter the
vehicle. The light on the recirculation button will go off.
Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculation
feature. To resume the auto recirculation function, press
the AUTO button. Each time the vehicle is started, the
system will revert to the auto recirculation function.
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or floor,
the light in the button will flash and then go out to let you
know that this is not allowed. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
3-21
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time may cause
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select
either defog or front defrost.
If you press the up or down arrows on the fan switch,
the display will change to show the selected fan speed.
After ten seconds, the display will change to show
the driver temperature setting and the selected mode.
You may also notice that the A/C compressor will run
while in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
Whenever you press AUTO, the display will change
to show the following:
9(Off):
Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the up
or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, the
AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
Display
If you press the MODE button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air delivery mode. After ten seconds, the display will
change to show the driver temperature setting and the
selected mode.
3-22
• the current driver’s set temperature and an arrow
for five seconds,
• the current passenger’s set temperature setting and
an arrow for five seconds and
• the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed.
If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings are
the same when AUTO is pressed, the temperature
setting and both arrows will be displayed for five
seconds along with the automatic air delivery mode and
fan speed. After the five second update, the display
will change to show the temperature setting, both arrows
and AUTO.
Air Conditioning
#(Air Conditioning):
Press this button to turn the air
conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. The
snowflake symbol will appear on the display when the
A/C is on.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is
too cool for air conditioning to be effective will make the
snowflake symbol flash three times and then turn off
to let you know that the air conditioning mode is
not available. If the air conditioning is on and the outside
temperature drops below a temperature which is too
cool for air conditioning to be effective, the snowflake
symbol will turn off to let you know that the air
conditioning mode has been canceled.
^ (Air Conditioning Off):
On some vehicles, when
you turn the air conditioning off, this symbol will appear
on the display. If your vehicle does not have this
symbol, the snowflake symbol will turn off to let you
know the air conditioning is off.
When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode, the
system will run the air conditioning automatically to cool
and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle. If you select
A/C off while in front defrost, defog or recirculation, the
A/C snowflake symbol will turn off, but the A/C
compressor will still run to help prevent fogging.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm
air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn the
temperature knob to the desired setting.
In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify the
air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the
system will maximize its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
Heating
On cold days when using manual operation of the
automatic system, choose floor mode to deliver air to
the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn
the temperature knob to the desired setting.
If you want to use the automatic mode, press AUTO and
adjust the temperature by turning the temperature knob.
The heater works best if you keep the windows closed
while using it.
3-23
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front
defrost button to defrost the front windshield.
If your vehicle has this feature, the lines you see on the
rear window warm the glass. The rear window
defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fog
or moisture. Press the mode button to select this
setting. This setting will deliver air to the floor and
windshield outlets.
<(Rear):
0 (Front Defrost):
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. If you need additional
warming time, press the button again.
Press the front defrost button to
defrost the windshield. The system will automatically
control the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO
mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or
warmer, your air conditioning compressor will
automatically run to help dehumidify the air and dry the
windshield.
3-24
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this
button will activate them.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
Outlet Adjustment
Climate Controls Personalization
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the
direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle. Push
the knob in the center of the outlet up, down, left or right
to move the outlet in the direction you would like. Turn the
knob in the center of the outlet so the louvers open or
close to increase or decrease airflow.
If your vehicle is equipped with the electronic climate
control system, you can store and recall the climate
control settings for temperature, air delivery mode and
fan speed for two different drivers. The personal
choice settings recalled are determined by the
transmitter used to enter the vehicle.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
After the button with the unlock symbol on a remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the climate control
will adjust to the last settings of the identified driver.
The settings can also be changed by pressing one of the
memory buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door.
When adjustments are made, the new settings are
automatically saved for that driver.
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your
vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-25
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-26
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a message center that works
along with warning lights and gages. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-47.
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-27
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a
glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have
and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not operate the engine
with the tachometer in the shaded warning area.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the
driver information center. You can set a Trip A and Trip
B odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-44.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
be provided for several seconds to remind people to
buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light will
also be provided and stay on for several seconds,
then it will flash for several more. You should buckle
your seat belt.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
3-28
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will be provided.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-58.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-29
Airbag Off Light
When you turn the right front passenger’s airbag off,
this light will come on and stay on to remind you that the
airbag has been turned off. This light will go off when
you turn the airbag back on again. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 1-65 for more on this, including
important safety information.
United States
3-30
Canada
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned
off for a person who is not in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person will not have the extra protection of an
airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to
inflate and help protect the person sitting
there. Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag
unless the person sitting there is in a risk
group. See ″Airbag Off Switch″ in the Index for
more on this, including important safety
information.
Charging System Light
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s airbag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group sit in
the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)
until you have your vehicle serviced. See
Airbag Off Switch on page 1-65, for more on
this, including important safety information.
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
When this light comes on the DIC will also display the
battery not charging message. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-47.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-31
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
in RUN, this gage
shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
3-32
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will
flash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try
to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime will
sound when the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or may go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on
page 4-64.
3-33
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds.
That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. You will also hear a
chime sound when the light is on steady. If the regular
brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have
brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on you don’t
have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with
your regular brakes. In addition to both lights, you will
also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of
a problem and each time the vehicle is shut off and then
restarted. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-32.
3-34
Traction Off Light
The traction off light will
come on when a traction
control system or anti-lock
brake system problem
has been detected.
The vehicle may need
service.
When this light is on, the system will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
If the Traction Control System (TCS) detects that the
vehicle’s brake’s are overheating, the TCS will shut off
and the traction off light will come on. When the
brakes cool off, the TCS will turn back on automatically
and the traction off light will go out.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
Transmission Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the
temperature of the transmission fluid. The normal
operating range is from 100°F (38°C) to about
265°F (130°C).
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
3-35
At approximately 265°F (130°C), the DIC will display a
TRANSMISSION HOT message and the transmission
will enter a transmission protection mode. When
the transmission enters the protection mode, you may
notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns.
The transmission will return to normal shifting patterns
when the transmission fluid temperature falls below
260°F (127°C).
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the DIC will
display a TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE warning message
and a chime will sound. Pull the vehicle off the
roadway when it is safe to do so. Set the parking brake,
place the transmission in PARK (P) and allow the
engine to idle until the transmission temperature falls
below 260°F (127°C). If the transmission continues
to operate above 265°F (130°C), please contact your
nearest dealer or the GM Roadside Assistance Center.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43
for further information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above normal
operating range, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your
vehicle while the transmission temperature gage
reading is above normal. See your dealer for service.
3-36
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Towing a trailer,
hot outside air temperatures,
hauling a large or heavy load,
low transmission fluid level,
high transmission fluid level,
restricted air flow to the radiator.
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good,
and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could
lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by
your warranty.
3-37
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoiding hard accelerations
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
3-38
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
3-39
Oil Pressure Gage
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa
(kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon
as possible. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
3-40
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Security Light
Cruise Control Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START.
The light will stay on until
the engine starts.
If the light flashes, the Passlock® system has entered a
tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®
on page 2-24.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your dealer.
The cruise light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control. See “Cruise
Control” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-7.
Highbeam On Light
This light will illuminate
when the headlamp high
beams are in use.
Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-22 for
additional information regarding the security light.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
3-41
Tow/Haul Mode Light
Fuel Gage
This light is displayed
when the tow/haul mode
has been activated.
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-68.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as
possible.
3-42
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
The DIC buttons are located on the steering wheel.
The DIC can display information such as the trip
odometer, fuel economy, personalization features and
warning/status messages.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-5.
A 3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressure (for
vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor), timer
and engine hours.
B t (Fuel Information): Press this button to display
the current range, fuel used, average fuel economy and
engine oil life.
3-43
C 4 (Personalization): Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle.
D r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions and set your personalization settings.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge DIC messages and clear
them from the DIC display.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the
ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display
the information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons
or the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge or clear
most current warnings or service messages. Some
warnings that cannot be acknowledged or cleared are:
ENGINE OVERHEATED, OIL PRESSURE LOW,
REDUCED ENGINE POWER, TRANS HOT IDLE
ENGINE. These warnings must be dealt with
immediately and therefore cannot be cleared until the
problem has been corrected.
3-44
You should take any message that appears on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear, not
correct the problem.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the steering
wheel. These buttons are trip information, fuel
information, personalization and select. The button
functions are detailed in the following pages.
Trip Information Button
Press the trip information button to scroll through the
ODOMETER, TRIP A, TRIP B, TIRE PRESSURES,
TIMER and ENGINE HOURS.
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles or kilometers. Pressing the reset stem
located on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off will
also display the odometer.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
miles or kilometers.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A or
TRIP B.
You can also reset TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster. If
you press and hold the reset stem or the select
button for four seconds, the display will show the
distance traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A
or TRIP B.
Tire Pressures: The tire pressure mode is available
only on vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor.
Press the trip information button until TIRE
PRESSURES appears on the display. This mode shows
the tire pressure in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa). Press the select button to scroll
through the following information:
• LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the left
front tire.
• RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the right
front tire.
• LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the left
rear tire.
• RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the right
rear tire.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will roll back to zero.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Engine Hours: Press the trip information button until
ENGINE HOURS appears on the display. This
mode shows the total number of hours the engine has
run. Pressing and holding the reset stem located on
the instrument cluster for about four seconds will also
display the engine hour information after the odometer is
displayed when the vehicle is off.
3-45
Fuel Information Button
Press the fuel information button to scroll through the
range, fuel used, average fuel economy and the Engine
Oil Life System.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling. It is
based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the
tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an
average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated. Fuel
range cannot be reset.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for one
second while FUEL USED is displayed.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past driving conditions.
3-46
Press and hold the select button for one second while
AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy is not
reset, it will be continually updated each time you drive.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The Engine Oil Life System shows an estimate of
the oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when
the system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you to
change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change. To
reset the Engine Oil Life System, use the fuel button
to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen and then press
and hold the select button for five seconds while
ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. OIL LIFE RESET will
appear on the display for 10 seconds to let you know the
system is reset. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 5-16 for more information.
In addition to the Engine Oil Life System monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
Personalization Button
Press the personalization button to access the VEHICLE
SETTINGS menu and customize the personalization
settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-54 for more information.
Select Button
Press the select button to reset certain DIC functions
and set your personalization settings. For example, this
button will reset the trip odometers and scroll through
the languages you can select the DIC to display
information in.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Warning messages are displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to notify the driver that the
status of the vehicle has changed and that some action
may be needed by the driver to correct the condition.
If there is more than one message that needs to
be displayed they will appear one after another. Some
messages may not require immediate action, but
you should press any of the four DIC buttons located on
the steering wheel or the trip odometer reset stem
located on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge
that you received the messages and clear them from
the display. Some messages cannot be cleared from the
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be removed from the DIC
display. You should take any messages that appear
on the display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages will only make the messages disappear,
not correct the problem. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible. Pressing any of
the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will
clear the message from the DIC display.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed. See “Engine Oil Life System” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-44 and Engine
Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information on how to
reset the message. This message will clear itself
after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.
3-47
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
CHECK WASHER FLUID
On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging system, this message
will appear on the DIC, a chime will sound and the
charging system light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on. See Charging System Light on page 3-31
for more information. Driving with this problem could
drain your battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so. Have the electrical system checked by your
GM dealer immediately.
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip
odometer reset stem will clear it from the DIC display.
This message will clear itself after 10 seconds until
the next ignition cycle.
CHECK OIL LEVEL
If the oil level in the vehicle is low, this message will
appear on the DIC. Check the oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool or
warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message
will clear. Once the problem is corrected, pressing
any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset
stem will clear this message from the DIC display. This
message will clear itself after 10 seconds until the
next ignition cycle.
3-48
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in
a drive gear, this message will appear on the display and
you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstacles, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing any
of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stem
will clear the message from the DIC display.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC. Stop the vehicle and let the
engine idle in PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach a
safe temperature. This message will clear when the
coolant temperature drops to a safe operating
temperature. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or
the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from
the DIC display.
ENGINE OVERHEATED
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation, this message will appear in
the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe
damage. This message will clear when the engine
has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear
on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and
close the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will clear the
message from the DIC display.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the fuel level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon as
possible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the
trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the
DIC display. It will also clear itself after 10 seconds.
The low fuel light near the fuel gage will still remain on
in either case.
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW
OIL LIFE RESET
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-5. Pressing any of the four
DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will clear
the message from the DIC display.
This message will appear on the display for about
10 seconds after resetting the change engine oil
message.
If your vehicle has a low coolant sensor and the engine
coolant level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC. Adding coolant will clear the message. This
message will clear itself after 10 seconds until the next
ignition cycle.
3-49
OIL PRESSURE LOW
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will be
displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate
it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
On the SUT, if the midgate is open or one or both of the
midgate latches are not fully closed, this message will
appear on the DIC. Turn off the vehicle and check that
the midgate and the latches are closed. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer
reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message is displayed when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters
the engine coolant protection mode.
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear on
the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will clear the
message from the DIC display.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26 for further
information.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
REPLACE LIFTGATE FUSE
On the SUV, if the liftgate is open while the ignition is in
RUN, this message will appear on the DIC and you will
hear a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC
display. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the trip
odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC
display.
This message will be displayed if the liftgate lock
malfunctions and/or the liftgate fuse blows. For more
information on fuses, see Instrument Panel Fuse Block
on page 5-103 and Underhood Fuse Block on
page 5-107.
3-50
You may also see this message when the vehicle
determines a problem with the electronic throttle control.
See your GM dealer for service.
If the message returns after replacing the fuse, see your
GM dealer for service.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
SERVICE AIR SUSPENSION
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed and
the vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop
and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles,
and close the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four
DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will clear
the message from the DIC display.
If a problem occurs with the suspension system, this
message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, there is
a problem with the air suspension system. See your
GM dealer for service.
SERVICE 4WD
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If a problem occurs with the all-wheel drive system, this
message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, there is
a problem with the four wheel drive system. See your
GM dealer for service. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons or the trip odometer reset stem will clear
the message from the DIC display.
If a problem occurs with the brake system, this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, there is a problem with the brake
system. See your GM dealer for service. Pressing any
of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer reset
stem will clear the message from the DIC display.
SERVICE AIR BAG
If there is a problem with the air bag system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have your
GM dealer inspect the system for problems. Pressing
any of the four DIC buttons or the trip odometer
reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display.
3-51
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM
TRACTION ACTIVE
On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the battery
charging system, this message will appear on the
DIC. The battery will not be charging at an optimal rate
and the vehicle will lose the ability to enter the fuel
economy mode. The vehicle is safe to drive, however
you should have the electrical system checked by
your GM dealer. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or
the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message
from the DIC display.
When the traction control system has detected that any
of the vehicle’s wheels are slipping, the traction
control system will activate and this message will appear
on the DIC. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-9 for more information.
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly, this
message may appear along with the check engine light
on the instrument panel cluster. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 3-37. Reinstall the fuel cap, making sure
to fully install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light and message off.
3-52
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE
If the transmission fluid gets hot, this message will
appear on the DIC along with a continuous chime.
Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can
cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and
let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message
will clear and the chime will stop when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
TRANSMISSION HOT
If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high, this
message will appear on the DIC.
When the transmission enters the protection mode, you
may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
• Low transmission fluid level
• High transmission fluid level
• Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped)
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons or the
trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from
the DIC display.
• Towing a trailer
• Hot outside air temperatures
• Hauling a large or heavy load
3-53
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle may have personalization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one personalized
setting based on your preference. All of the options
listed may not be available on your vehicle. Only
the options available will be displayed on your Driver
Information Center (DIC).
The default settings for the personalization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have been
changed from their default state since then.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P). Press the
personalization button to scroll through the available
personalization options.
Lock Doors
Press the personalization button until LOCK DOORS
appears in the display. To select your personalization for
automatic locking, press the select button while LOCK
DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
3-54
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Unlock Doors
Press the personalization button until UNLOCK DOORS
appears in the display. To select your personalization
for automatic unlocking, press the select button
while UNLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Door Lock Delay
If your DIC does not have this feature, you can still
program the delayed locking feature. See Delayed
Locking on page 2-9 for more information.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter and a door or
the liftgate is open, the delayed locking feature will delay
locking the doors and tailgate until five seconds after
the last door is closed.
Press the personalization button until DOOR LOCK
DELAY appears in the display. To select your
personalization for delayed locking, press the select
button while DOOR LOCK DELAY is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
DOOR LOCK DELAY: OFF (default): The doors will
lock immediately when pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
DOOR LOCK DELAY: ON: The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed.
You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed
locking feature is in use. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the lock button on the door or
the remote keyless entry transmitter a second time.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
Lock Feedback
Press the personalization button until LOCK FEEDBACK
appears in the display. To select your personalization
for the feedback you receive when locking the
vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter, press
the select button while LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
3-55
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Unlock Feedback
Press the personalization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
personalization for the feedback you will receive when
unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
3-56
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Headlamp Delay
Press the personalization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY appears in the display. To select your
personalization for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMP DELAY is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
•
•
•
•
HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Perimeter Lights
Press the personalization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS appears in the display. To select your
personalization for perimeter lighting, press the select
button while PERIMETER LIGHTS is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Easy Exit Seat
Press the personalization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears in the display. To select your personalization
for seat position exit, press the select button while EASY
EXIT SEAT is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit
recall will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit, see Memory Seat on
page 2-63.
3-57
Curb View
Alarm Warning
Press the personalization button until CURB VIEW
appears in the display. To select your personalization
for curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW
is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following choices:
Press the personalization button until ALARM
WARNING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for alarm warning, press the select
button while ALARM WARNING is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse, see Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View Assist on
page 2-48.
3-58
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-22.
Elevated Idle
Language
The elevated idle feature is available on diesel engine
vehicles only. Press the personalization button until
ELEVATED IDLE appears in the display. To select your
personalization for elevated idle, press the select
button while ELEVATED IDLE is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
To select your personalization for display language,
press the select button while LANGUAGE is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following languages:
ELEVATED IDLE: OFF (default): The elevated
idle/exhaust restrictor feature is turned off. See
“Elevated Idle/Exhaust Restrictor” under Starting and
Operating Your Vehicle in your DURAMAX™ Diesel
supplement.
ELEVATED IDLE: ON: The elevated idle/exhaust
restrictor feature is turned on. See “Elevated
Idle/Exhaust Restrictor” under Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle in your DURAMAX™ Diesel supplement.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
• ENGLISH
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold the personalization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
Francais will be in French and Espanol will be in
Spanish. When you see the language that you would
like, release both buttons. The DIC will then display the
information in the language you chose.
You can also scroll through the different languages
by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for
four seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.
3-59
Display Units
Press the personalization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric,
press the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
• DISPLAY UNITS: ENGLISH
• DISPLAY UNITS: METRIC
If you choose English, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance in miles and fuel
economy in miles per gallon.
Choose one of the available options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and end out of the personalization options.
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-26 for more
information.
3-60
Setting the Time
Radio with Cassette and CD
The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR
to represent hours and an M or MN to represent
minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
button until the correct minute appears on the display.
The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
the hour and minute buttons at the same time until RDS
TIME appears on the display. To accept this time, press
and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the same time,
for another two seconds. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
3-61
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers 100 coast to
coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title and
artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
3-62
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and
the time. When the ignition is off, press this knob to
display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will now
be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear on the
display. Each higher setting will provide more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn automatic
volume off, press this button until AVOL OFF appears on
the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will show
the selection.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the SCAN
or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds. PSCN
will appear on the display and you will hear a double
beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop
scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing
the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
© SCAN ¨:
Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on the
display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again
to stop scanning.
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-63
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
3-64
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose audio system, the
equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and hold
it until the radio produces one beep. The balance and
fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the
display will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed, go
back to Step 1.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit
program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two
seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
at a station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-65
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the following
steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
3-66
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO will appear on the display.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-67
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM
dealer.
3-68
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, press the eject button or
the INFO knob to insert and to begin play of a tape.
If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The cassette
tape symbol will appear on the display and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing. The tape
player will play the other side of the tape when it
reaches the end.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous selection on the tape if the current selection has
been playing for less than three seconds. If pressed when
the current selection has been playing from three to
13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the previous
selection or the beginning of the current selection,
depending on the position on the tape. If pressed when
the current selection has been playing for more than
13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current
selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to -9.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. Pressing this pushbutton multiple times, in next
mode, will increase the number of selections to be
searched forward. SEEK and a positive number
will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
Select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE
and SEEK.
3-69
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The radio will play while the
tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The station frequency and FWD will
appear on the display. Select stations during forward
operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.
© SEEK ¨:
The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If either arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next selection, play for 10 seconds,
then go on to the next selection. Press either the SCAN
or the TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning. The
tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
3-70
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when it is
playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject may
be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play due to one of the
following errors:
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your
player is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-91.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your GM
dealer when reporting the problem.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the tape symbol on the display will flash, indicating
the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the INFO knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-71
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. TRACK and the track number will appear on
the display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving backward
through the CD.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the display.
If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the CD.
© SEEK ¨:
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
3-72
Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or
the TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The
radio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then
go on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-73
Radio with Six-Disc CD
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
3-74
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers 100 coast to
coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title and
artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
the volume.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and
the time. When the ignition is off, press this knob to
display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will now
be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL
OFF appears on the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-75
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SC appears on
the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PRESET SCAN will appear on the display and you
will hear a double beep. The radio will go to a preset
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing
the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
3-76
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is weak
or noisy, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio
will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the
middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or
speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED will appear
on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose audio system, the
equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward
the front or the rear speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either the
TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take you
to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed, go
back to Step 1.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit
program type select mode.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
3-77
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want
to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk will
appear beside that PTY on the display. Select multiple
interrupts if desired. When listening to a CD, the
last selected RDS station will interrupt play if that
selected program type format is broadcast.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
at a station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
3-78
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
Radio Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-79
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-80
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM
dealer.
3-81
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-82
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
MULTI LOAD # will appear on the display.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The
CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load
more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear under
the CD number that is playing and the track number will
appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
CD
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
EJECT ALL will appear on the display.
2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
REMOVE CD # will appear on the display. The
CD will eject and can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will
begin flashing again and another CD will eject.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
eject button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time
period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
eject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
3-83
{ REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
3-84
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
©SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will
begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After two
seconds of continuously pressing the SONG LIST
button, two beeps will sound to confirm the
track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
3-85
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to
save more than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPE
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return
to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, one
beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
3-86
To delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep will be heard,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
CD Messages
Navigation/Radio System
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that
includes Radio Data System (RDS) with Program Type
(PTY) selections that will seek out the kind of music you
want to listen to and XM™ Satellite Radio Service
capabilities (if equipped). The radio can also
communicate with the navigation system to broadcast
announcements on traffic, weather, and emergency alert
communications. For information on how to use this
system, see the “Navigation System” manual.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the sources: radio, cassette tapes, or CDs. However,
the rear seat passengers can only control the sources
that the front seat passengers are not listening to. For
example, rear seat passengers may listen to and control
cassette tapes or CDs through the headphones while the
driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The
rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each
set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority over
the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch the
source for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA will
not be able to control the source. You can operate the
rear seat audio when the main radio is off.
3-87
SRC (Source): Press this button to select a source:
radio, cassette tape, or CD.
x SEEK w:
When listening to FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2 (if equipped), press the up or the down arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio.
When a cassette tape is playing, press the up or the
down arrow to go to the next or the previous selection.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are
listening to a cassette tape.
P (Power):
Press this button to turn the system on or
off. The rear speakers will be muted when the power
is turned on unless your vehicle is equipped with
the Bose® audio system.
u (Volume):
Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. The left knob controls the left
headphones and the right knob controls the right
headphones.
3-88
When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to got to the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station set on the pushbuttons on the main
radio. This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
are listening to the radio.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to go to
the other side of the tape. This function is inactive if the
front seat passengers are listening to a cassette tape.
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
beginning of the CD. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to a CD.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
g (OnStar/Voice Recognition):
Press this button to
interact with the OnStar® system. See the OnStar®
manual provided with your vehicle for more information.
3-89
PROG (Program): Press this button to play the stations
that are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will go to the first preset station, play for a few
seconds, then go to the next preset station. Press this
button again to stop scanning. The radio will only
scan preset stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to
play the other side of the tape.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded.
Q SOURCE R:
Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1, or XM2 (if equipped), or a
cassette tape or CD. The cassette or CD must be loaded
to play. Available loaded sources are shown on the
display as a tape or a CD symbol.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a cassette tape or CD is playing, press the up or
the down arrow to fast forward or reverse.
3-90
Q VOLR (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hours
without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message
appears on the display, the cassette tape player
needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should
be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape
or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
tape detection feature on the radio may recognize it as a
broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the
cut tape detection feature will be active again.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
3-91
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened.
Care of Your CDs
Chime Level Adjustment
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The radio is the vehicle’s chime producer. To change
the volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with
the ignition on and the radio power off. The chime
volume level will change from the normal level to loud,
and LOUD will appear on the radio display. To
change back to the default or normal setting, press and
hold pushbutton 6 again. The chime level will change
from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appear
on the radio display. Removing the radio and not
replacing it with a factory radio or chime will disable
vehicle chimes.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-92
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Locking Rear Axle ........................................4-10
Steering ......................................................4-11
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13
Passing .......................................................4-13
Loss of Control .............................................4-15
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-16
Driving at Night ............................................4-39
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-40
City Driving ..................................................4-43
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-44
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-45
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-46
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-46
Winter Driving ..............................................4-48
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ........4-52
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-53
Recovery Loops ...........................................4-53
First Aid Kit and Tool Kit ...............................4-55
Front Mounted Receiver .................................4-56
Power Winch Platform ...................................4-57
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-58
Towing ..........................................................4-64
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-64
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-64
Selectable Extended Rear
Ride Height ..............................................4-65
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System ....................................................4-66
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-67
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-68
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-16.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
4-2
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-9.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-34.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
4-8
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the system applies the
brakes to limit wheel spin.
The Traction Control System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration or a pumping sound.
This is normal and doesn’t mean there’s a problem with
your vehicle. Examples of these conditions include hard
acceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift of
the transmission or driving on rough roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
Cruise Control on page 3-10.
Another feature of this system is the Traction Control 2
(TC2) mode. TC2 should be selected for improved
traction and system performance when the vehicle is on
loose surfaces such as deep sand or mud.
To enter this mode,
press the TC2 button
located on the instrument
panel to the right of
the steering wheel.
TC2 only operates in the following transfer case modes:
• 4HI Lock
• 4LO Lock
• 4LO Lock and Rear Axle Lock
See Locking Rear Axle on page 4-10 for more
information on the rear axle lock.
It will not operate in 4HI. If the TC2 button is pressed
while in 4HI, the light will flash for about 15 seconds and
then go out. The light should also come on briefly
when you turn the ignition key to RUN; if it doesn’t see
your dealer for service.
If you restart your engine, the system reverts to the
standard TCS mode.
4-9
The traction off light will
come on when a Traction
Control System or
Anti-Lock Brake System
problem has been
detected and the vehicle
needs service.
See Traction Off Light on page 3-34.
When the traction off light is on, adjust your
driving accordingly.
Locking Rear Axle
The locking rear axle can give your vehicle additional
traction from the rear wheels when traveling in off-road
situations such as mud, snow, sand, steep hills and
uneven terrain.
The button used to turn
this feature on or off is
located above the transfer
case buttons to the
right of the steering wheel.
The traction control system, as delivered from the
factory, will automatically come on whenever you start
your vehicle.
To lock the rear axle, do the following:
1. Place the transfer case in the 4LO Lock mode. This
is the only mode which will allow the rear axle to
lock. See All-Wheel Drive on page 2-32 for
more information regarding the transfer case and
4LO Lock mode.
2. Press the button with the vehicle stopped or moving
less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
4-10
You must wait for the light in the button to stop flashing
and remain illuminated before the rear axle is locked.
Steering Tips
Notice: If you try to lock the rear axle while
your vehicle is stuck and the tires are spinning, you
could damage your vehicle’s drivetrain. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Always lock the rear axle before attempting
situations and/or navigating terrain which could
possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
The locking rear axle will be disengaged when the
vehicle’s speed is greater than 20 mph (32 km/h), if the
vehicle’s battery is low and/or the transfer case is
shifted out of 4LO Lock mode.
Notice: If you lock the rear axle while driving on
pavement, you could damage your vehicle’s
drivetrain. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not use the locking rear axle on
pavement. If you need four-wheel drive when
traveling on pavement, use only 4HI.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Driving on Curves
4-11
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. See Braking on page 4-6.
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
4-12
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it is all right to pass,
providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-13
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,
you will not have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
4-14
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that if
your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-15
Off-Road Driving
This off-road guide is meant to provide advice for when
you drive your vehicle off paved roads. Also, see
Braking on page 4-6.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is
why it is very important that you read this guide. You will
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help
make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields are properly attached. Make sure any
equipment you may need (first aid kit, cell phone,
flashlight, etc.) is securely stored in the vehicle.
4-16
Be sure you read all the information about your
four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough
fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid
levels up where they should be? What are the local
laws that apply to off-roading where you will be driving?
If you do not know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
Removable Side Steps
Your vehicle may be equipped with removable
side steps.
Remove the steps prior to off roading to give your
vehicle more ground clearance and to prevent damage
to the vehicle from the side steps dragging and/or
catching on obstacles.
Notice: Do not drive off road with the side steps
attached to your vehicle. You can damage the side
steps and/or your vehicle’s frame if they get caught
or drag against an obstacle. This damage would not
be covered by your vehicle’s warranty. Always
remove the side steps prior to any off road driving.
U-Type Side Steps
The following instructions show how to install the
optional U-type steps. If you want to remove them, just
reverse the instructions:
1. Start with the side step brackets pointing up and
away from you, or just make sure the HUMMER
logo faces up.
2. For the front step, use the first and third brackets
on the vehicle from the front tire. For the rear step,
use the first and third brackets on the vehicle
from the rear tire.
You will notice that the side steps have pins on
both sides of the step brackets. This is because the
steps are interchangeable between front/back
and the driver/passenger sides of the vehicle. Use
the pins as follows:
• Driver Side: Look at the side step with the
HUMMER logo facing you. You will use the pins
which are on the right side of each side step
bracket. This works for the front or rear of
the vehicle.
3. Guide the pins on the side step brackets into the
holes in the vehicle’s rocker panel protector
brackets. If you have difficulty doing this, it may
help to have someone hold up the step while you
guide the pins into the holes.
You will be guiding three pins into the holes with
the fourth hole in the vehicle’s rocker panel protector
brackets empty until the next step.
• Passenger Side: Look at the side step with the
HUMMER logo facing you. You will use the pins
which are on the left side of each side step
bracket. This works for the front or rear of
the vehicle.
4-17
4. Thread the knob through the remaining hole — first
into the rocker panel protector and then into the
threaded hole in the side step bracket.
Notice: Threading the knob into the side step and
then into the rocker panel will not secure the step.
The step could fall off the vehicle and be damaged.
Always thread the knob through the rocker panel
first. After the knob is installed, try moving the step
left and right to be sure the step is secure.
4-18
5. Hand-tighten the knob by turning it clockwise until it
is seated against the rocker panel protector bracket
and then tighten it to 10 lb ft (13.5 Y) with the
tool as shown.
6. Once the knob is
torqued, install the
cotter pin through the
hole in the end of the
knob’s threaded shaft.
Tubular Side Steps
This will help prevent the knob from coming completely
loose and falling out.
The driver’s side of the vehicle is shown with the body
removed for clarity. To remove a step:
1. Remove the nuts and bolts attaching the step to
the vehicle.
2. Remove the step from the vehicle.
4-19
To install a step:
1. Before installing the bolts:
• Remove all traces of the original adhesive patch.
• Clean the threads of the bolts with denatured
alcohol or equivalent and allow threads to dry.
• Apply Threadlocker (GM Part No. 12345382, in
Canada 10953489) or equivalent.
2. Install the side step to the vehicle. You may need
someone to assist you in the installation.
3. Install the nuts and bolts for the two inner brackets
first, but do not tighten them.
4. Using a level, make sure the step is level in
relationship to the vehicle. Then, tighten the
inner bracket nuts and bolts.
5. Install the other nuts and bolts. Tighten all nuts and
bolts to 39 lb ft (50 Y).
4-20
Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items in the
rear area, as far forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
Environmental Concerns
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
•
•
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground).
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58 and Tires
on page 5-54.
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-21
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
High Mobility Characteristics
The HUMMER H2 has a 10 inch (25.4 cm) running
ground clearance (A) and a 9 inch (22.8 cm) axle
to ground clearance (B) while maintaining a low
silhouette and a low center of gravity.
4-22
The HUMMER H2 has an approximate approach
angle (A) of 42° and a departure angle (B) of 37°,
depending on suspension packages.
Design specifications required a minimum gradeability of
60% (31°) slope, with the vehicle fully loaded, on high
friction surfaces at 6 mph (9.7 km/h). The vehicle is
expected to traverse this grade only for short durations.
Never stop and idle the vehicle or park it on this grade.
4-23
Also, your vehicle should be able to traverse a 40%
(22°) side slope at 6 mph (9.7 km/h) while fully loaded
on high friction surfaces.
4-24
Your vehicle can climb a 16 inch (40.6 cm) vertical step.
Step climbing is best done by approaching the step at
an angle rather than straight on.
Brake and Accelerator Operation
Techniques for Off-Road Driving
For mounds, washouts, loose up-hill
slopes, ditches, etc.
For logs, walls, rocks, severe ditches,
hills, sand, etc.
When wheel spin occurs as the vehicle is moving, the
driver may notice a slight shaking or shuddering of
the vehicle. This should be stopped as soon as possible
to prevent damage to vehicle components. This is the
indication that a loss of traction is occurring on this
terrain. The operator should:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Do not rev
the engine.
2. Select the proper transmission and transfer case
gear range; usually FIRST (1) gear, 4LO LOCK for
such obstacles.
1. Reduce speed and apply the brakes.
3. If wheel spin is experienced, maintain steady
throttle, with your foot off the brake pedal, to
allow the TCS to control the wheel spin. TCS will
not operate if the brakes are applied, even slightly.
2. Assess the terrain properly and adjust vehicle
speed and gear ranges accordingly: 4HI position
for higher speeds and 4LO LOCK for more torque
and lower speeds. Transmission FIRST (1) gear
is generally recommended.
4. If wheel spin cannot be controlled by the system,
fully press the brake pedal with your left foot so all
wheel spin is halted.
3. Apply slight pressure to the brake when the shaking
or shuddering sensation is felt, keeping the vehicle
moving in a controlled manner.
5. Back away from the obstacle so that a new
approach can be tried.
4. Be prepared to alternate between braking and
accelerating through the adverse terrain.
6. As the first wheel crosses the obstacle, be prepared
to alternate the brake and accelerator pedal to
maintain control and avoid tire drop-off from
obstacles. Repeat this process for the other wheels.
4-25
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
4-26
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer
braking distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When possible, it is a good practice to survey the
landscape ahead on foot prior to driving to observe
hidden obstacles.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-2.
4-27
Crossing Obstacles
Approach Angle — a Key to Mobility
If you encounter a large dip in the terrain, do not enter
straight on; enter at an angle — 15° minimum
approach (A), 75° maximum approach angle (B). For
very large dips, ditches or small washes, coast in, using
the engine as a brake (transmission and transfer
case lowest gears). Then, use the low ranges in the
transmission and transfer case to power out.
4-28
Roll Your Tires Over Large Rocks
Do not straddle large
rocks; drive over them,
letting the tire envelop the
rock. The tread of the
tire is thicker and tougher
than the sidewall of the
tire and is more resilient to
impact than underbody
components.
Log Crossing
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Using the proper technique, your vehicle will cross logs
up to 10 inches (25.4 cm) in diameter. Approach the
log at approximately a 15° angle (A) with the
transmission in FIRST (1) and the transfer case in 4LO
LOCK and “walk” your vehicle over, one tire at a
time. As with all obstacles, face your tires perpendicular
to the object for best traction and tire life. It may be
necessary to modulate your brake pedal and accelerator
to avoid spin-out. Ease the vehicle down from the log
with your brake.
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
4-29
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill:
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps:
• Use transmission and transfer case low gear and
get a firm grip on the steering wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Let the traction system work to control any wheel
slippage. The traction control system allows for
moderate wheel spin with some capability to dig in
and power up the hill.
4-30
• Do not continue if the vehicle shudders or
exhibits suspension hopping. This can cause
damage to the driveline or suspension components.
Improper driving technique is not covered by
your vehicle warranty.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
4-31
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or
is about to stall, and I cannot make it up
the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-32
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill:
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just cannot do it. What should
I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
Logs? Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a
{CAUTION:
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with
large rocks?
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave the
transfer case in the 4 HI, 4 HI Lock or 4 LO
Lock position.
4-33
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you
•
•
ignore them you could lose control and have a
serious accident:
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” Your
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do:
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
4-34
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble
end over end. But when you drive across an incline,
the much more narrow track width (the distance
between the left and right wheels) may not prevent
the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also,
driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it
can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut,
etc.) and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
4-35
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck. Be careful to keep mud from building
up and washing onto the engine cooling system.
4-36
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as
on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink
into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts. Your vehicle is
capable of depths up to 20 inches. Know how to judge
whether the water is deeper than this before
proceeding into it.
4-37
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long
as your tailpipe is under water, you will never be
able to start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may
take you longer to stop.
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll
the vehicle over. Do not drive through
rushing water.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-40 for
more information on driving through water.
4-38
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the engine and oil
coolers for mud accumulation. Thoroughly and carefully
clean these devices to allow proper cooling. Check
the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires
and exhaust system for damage. Also, check the
fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Driving at Night
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
4-39
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-40
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-41
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could
be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-42
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-54.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-44.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-43
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Mile for mile, freeways—also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-44
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-45
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-46
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving on page 4-16 for information about driving
off-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
4-47
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
Winter Driving
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-54.
4-48
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-49
Your Traction Control System will help you to maintain
control of the vehicle when you accelerate on a
slippery road. If you are driving in deep snow, turn your
traction system to the TC2 mode. It will improve your
ability to accelerate. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-52. Even though your
vehicle has a traction system, you will want to slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you
will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-7.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-50
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-51
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as
little as possible. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on
the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-67.
4-52
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. Your vehicle
has a Traction Control System that will activate when
the system senses that the wheels are spinning.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for
more information. Then, with the wheels straight ahead,
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission
is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use your recovery loops. If you do need
to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-64.
Recovery Loops
Front of Vehicle
4-53
Your vehicle may be
equipped with recovery
loops at the front and rear
of your vehicle. You
may need to use them if
you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to
some place where you can
continue driving.
Rear of Vehicle
{CAUTION:
These loops, when used, are under a lot of
force. Keep people away from the vicinity of
the loops and any chains or cables during use.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull
on the loops at a sideways angle. The loops
could break off and you or others could be
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.
Notice: Never use the recovery loops to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
4-54
First Aid Kit and Tool Kit
The first aid and tool kit is located in the storage bin
behind the spare tire on SUV models. It is held in place
with a hook and loop fastener strap.
On SUT models, the kit is in the rear cargo compartment
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
The tire pressure gage has a reset button in the gage
stem. After taking a pressure reading, press the
button to reset the gage to zero.
The kit includes a first aid kit, a flashlight, a tire pressure
gage, and a multi-purpose tool set.
4-55
Front Mounted Receiver
You can use the receiver with a power winch
platform (described later in this section) or with
other accessories.
Never use the front mounted receiver to tow a trailer.
You can use the front mounted receiver to tow your
vehicle behind another. See Recreational Vehicle
Towing on page 4-64.
Receiver Extension
Use the receiver extension (if equipped) with the front
mounted receiver and various light-duty accessories
such as bike racks.
Notice: Do not attach accessories or cargo that
weigh more than 240 lbs. (108 kg) to the receiver
extension. You could damage the receiver extension
and/or your vehicle’s frame components.
Your vehicle is equipped with a front mounted receiver.
4-56
The receiver extension was not intended for
heavy-duty use, such as trailer towing, winching or
vehicle recovery.
To use the front mounted receiver with the receiver
extension, do the following:
Power Winch Platform
You can use the power winch platform (if equipped) with
an aftermarket winch. Connect the winch to the
platform and wiring to the vehicle following the winch
manufacturer’s guidelines.
Notice: Do not use the winch platform to winch at
a tension of more than 9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg). This
would damage your vehicle’s frame. This damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If you are using a winch to pull out another vehicle,
follow the winch manufacturer’s guidelines and observe
the following to prevent damage to your vehicle:
• If possible, have your vehicle anchored from
1. Locate the receiver extension (A) in the rear of the
vehicle where it is attached to the spare tire
mounting plate.
2. Loosen the wing nuts (B) holding the extension to
the spare tire plate and remove it.
3. The extension attaches to the front receiver exactly
as the power winch platform does. See “Power
Winch Platform” following in this section.
the opposite side of the winch to a solid,
immovable object.
If winching from the front, use both of the rear
recovery loops. If winching from the rear, use both
of the front recovery loops.
• Put your transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
• Use your regular brakes to hold your vehicle in
place and block the wheels to keep the vehicle
from moving.
4. Attach the accessory you will be using to the
receiver extension.
4-57
Notice: Using a power winch with the transmission
in gear to pull out another vehicle may damage
the transmission. When operating a power winch,
always leave the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: Driving your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with the winch installed, can cause
damage to your vehicle and the car wash. Always
remove the winch from your vehicle before using an
automatic car wash. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-96 for more information.
If you are using a winch to pull out your own vehicle,
follow the winch manufacturer’s guidelines for self
recovery and observe the following to prevent damage
to your vehicle:
• Do not self recover your vehicle by wrapping the
winch cable around an object (such as a pulley
block or tree) and attaching it back to your vehicle’s
recovery loops.
• Always attach the winch cable directly to a solid
anchor directly in front of your vehicle to achieve
a straight line pull.
4-58
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-54
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
United States version shown, Canada similar
The Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door
open, you will find the label attached below the door
lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label
shows the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-59
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-68 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
4-60
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-61
Certification/Tire Label
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
{CAUTION:
United States version shown, Canada similar
The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
4-62
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components that
fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and
installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else – they go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you can carry inside
your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you
buy and install the new equipment.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t
include the weight of the people inside. But you
can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving on
page 4-16.
4-63
Towing
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
Towing Your Vehicle
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-45.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Dinghy Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
4-64
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
All-Wheel Drive on page 2-32 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for
your vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle. You can use your vehicle’s front mounted
receiver with the proper accessories to tow it.
See “Front Mounted Receiver” under If You Are
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-52.
Selectable Extended Rear
Ride Height
7. Turn the engine off and leave the steering
column unlocked.
The selectable rear ride height allows you to raise the
rear of the vehicle about 2 inches (5 cm) over the normal
ride height. This can be helpful when driving off-road
where you may need more ground clearance to clear
an obstacle.
{CAUTION:
Shifting an all-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P). You
or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
If your vehicle has this feature it comes as part of the
electronically controlled air suspension system.
The button that controls
this feature is located
on the instrument panel
to the right of the
steering wheel.
Dolly Towing
Your vehicle can not be dolly towed. If you must tow
your vehicle behind another, use the dinghy towing
procedure listed previously.
Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle will
damage drivetrain components. Do not dolly
tow your vehicle.
4-65
To use this feature, ensure that the following conditions
are met:
• The engine must be running.
• All doors must be fully closed. The suspension will
not raise or lower if a door is open.
• The vehicle speed must be less than 40 mph
(64 km/h). The system will not activate otherwise.
Press the height control button to raise the rear of
the vehicle.
A light in the button will begin to flash as the rear of the
vehicle rises. Once the extended height has been
reached (this may take up to a minute), the warning
light will stop flashing and will stay lit while the vehicle is
at the extended height.
To lower the vehicle to the normal ride height, press the
button again. The light in the button will flash as the
suspension lowers. When the light in the button stops
flashing and goes out, the suspension has reached
the normal ride height.
This feature will lower the vehicle to the normal height if
vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph (64 km/h).
You may also want to use this feature when ascending,
descending or cresting a steep hill as this can help
prevent the rear bumper from dragging on the base of
the hill or prevent the vehicle from grounding out
(high centering) on the crest of the hill.
Do not use this feature when towing a trailer.
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System
The electronically controlled air suspension, if equipped,
keeps the rear of your vehicle level as you load and
unload it. The system includes a compressor, two height
sensor and two air springs supporting the vehicle.
The engine must be running for the system to level the
vehicle after loading or unloading. The system will
suspend leveling if any of the doors are open. Once the
doors are closed, system leveling will continue.
You may hear the compressor running when you load
your vehicle, and periodically as the system adjusts
the vehicle to the standard ride height. You may
also hear the release of air similar to a hissing sound
during suspension operation. This is normal.
Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator
hose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove the
inflater hose from the outlet when it is not in use. See
Accessory Inflator on page 5-67.
4-66
Overload and Overheat Protection
Trailer Recommendations
Overload protection is designed to protect the air
suspension system and is an indication to the driver that
the vehicle is overloaded.
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of
the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include
the weight of the people inside. But you can figure about
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo load
must not be more than your vehicle’s CWR.
If the rear suspension remains at a low height, the rear
axle load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating). When the overload protection mode is activated,
the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one
minute without raising the vehicle depending on the
amount of overload. This will continue each time
the ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is
reduced below GAWR.
If the total rear GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is
reached, the suspension may be slightly less than level.
This is normal and does not mean there is a problem
with the air suspension.
If the system overheats, it will shut down and stop all
leveling functions until the system cools down.
During this time the SERVICE AIR SUSPENSION
message will appear in the DIC. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-43 for more information.
Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you
won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-68.
4-67
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
4-68
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
Tow/Haul Mode
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” following.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires
Tow/haul mode is used when using your vehicle to pull
a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is also
useful while pulling a load in rolling terrain, in
stop-and-go traffic, or when you need improved
low-speed control, such as when parking. The purpose
of the tow/haul mode is to do the following:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less accelerator pedal activity when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
Tow/haul mode is most effective when the vehicle and
trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the vehicle’s
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR). See
“Weight of the Trailer” later in this section.
4-69
Press the button on the
instrument panel to the
right of the steering
wheel to enable the
tow/haul mode.
Press the button again to turn off tow/haul mode. The
indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off.
The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul mode
every time it is started.
Driving with tow/haul mode activated without a heavy
load or with no trailer will cause reduced fuel economy
and unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics, but will not cause damage.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
A light on the instrument
panel will illuminate to
indicate that tow/haul
mode has been selected.
4-70
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Use the following chart to determine how much your
vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model
and options.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Engine
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
**GCWR
6000 V8
4.10
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
13,500 lbs (6 123 kg)
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not
be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at the address listed
in your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-71
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. If
you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that
weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 500 lbs (227 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up
to a maximum of 700 lbs (318 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This
will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on
the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-72
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58. Then be
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure you
don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distribution spring bars.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle.
4-73
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. You should always use a sway control
if your trailer will weigh more than these limits. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you can
turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
4-74
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid
to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.
If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel
brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. Because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
4-75
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
4-76
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if
the transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul
Mode” earlier.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-77
Trailer Wiring Harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
The trailer towing harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Light Blue: Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
• Red: Battery Feed
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with a trailer towing harness.
This harness with a seven-pin universal heavy-duty
trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the
hitch platform.
A jumper harness for an electric trailer brake controller
and a trailer battery feed fuse may be included with
this trailering package. See “Instrument Panel Jumper
Wiring Harness” later in this section.
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way, round pin connector, an adapter may be
included. See “Four-Wire Harness Adapter” later in
this section.
4-78
Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness
Notice: If your vehicle has factory or
dealer-installed HUMMER off-road lamps, the place
where an electric trailer brake connection must
be made is already in use. Do not attempt to
double-up or “piggyback” the connection, because
this could cause a failure or damage to your
vehicle, the electric trailer brake system, or both. If
you want to connect a trailer with electric brakes
to your vehicle, see your dealer to disconnect
the off-road lamps. Also, read Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 5-102 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Be sure to use only the correct trailer brake
harness, the one intended for use on your
vehicle. If you use some other trailer brake
harness, even if it seems to fit, your trailer
brakes may not work at all. You could have a
crash in which you or others could be injured.
Use only the trailer brake harness intended for
your vehicle. If it is no longer available to you,
be sure to get a proper replacement from
your dealer.
This harness is for an electric brake controller and
includes a trailer battery feed fuse. It should be installed
by your dealer or a qualified service center.
This harness may be included with your vehicle as part
of the heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
4-79
Four-Wire Harness Adapter
This adapter may be
included with your vehicle
as part of the heavy-duty
trailer wiring package.
Use this adapter to connect a standard four-way
round pin connector to the seven-wire harness on
your vehicle.
4-80
Connect the adapter with the tab pointing up. The flip
cap on the vehicle’s seven-wire harness will lock
onto the tab (see arrow in the previous graphic) and
help hold the adapter in place. Plug the four-way round
pin connector onto the adapter.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood .....................5-9
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-21
Engine Coolant .............................................5-24
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26
Engine Overheating .......................................5-26
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-28
Cooling System ............................................5-29
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-33
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34
Brakes ........................................................5-35
Battery ........................................................5-38
Jump Starting ...............................................5-39
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-43
Rear Axle .......................................................5-44
Front Axle ......................................................5-44
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-45
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-45
Headlamps ..................................................5-46
Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps ..........................................5-47
Daytime Running Lamps ................................5-47
Roof Marker Lamps ......................................5-48
Taillamps .....................................................5-50
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-53
Tires ..............................................................5-54
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-60
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-61
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-63
Buying New Tires .........................................5-63
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-64
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-65
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-66
Tire Chains ..................................................5-67
Accessory Inflator .........................................5-67
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-69
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-70
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-71
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-79
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-86
Spare Tire ...................................................5-91
Appearance Care ............................................5-92
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-92
Vinyl ...........................................................5-94
Leather .......................................................5-94
Instrument Panel ..........................................5-94
Interior Plastic Components ............................5-94
Wood Panels ...............................................5-95
Speaker Covers ............................................5-95
Glass Surfaces .............................................5-95
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-95
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-95
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-96
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-97
5-2
Finish Care ..................................................5-97
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .........5-98
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-98
Tires ...........................................................5-99
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-99
Finish Damage .............................................5-99
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-99
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-99
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-100
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-101
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-101
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-101
Electrical System ..........................................5-102
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-102
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-102
Power Windows and Other
Power Options ........................................5-102
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-103
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-103
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..............5-106
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-107
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-112
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-101.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get
a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A
little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are
using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at
www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-37. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General
Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that
are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand
of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
The fuel cap is located
on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a fuel door. Open
the door to access the fuel cap.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a locking fuel cap.
Use the fuel cap key to unlock the fuel cap. If you
ever need a replacement key, your dealer can help you
get one.
5-7
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). While refueling, let the fuel cap
hang by the tether, if it has one.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-96.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-37.
5-8
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-37.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-9
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Release both hood side latches.
5-10
2. Pull the handle located
inside the vehicle to
the lower left of
the steering wheel.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. To close the hood, do the following:
1. Hold up the hood a few inches from the closed
position and then let it go so that it has enough
force to engage the hood latch.
2. Pull up on the assist handles to be sure that the
hood is latched.
3. Latch both hood side latches.
3. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull the
assist handles toward you to lift the hood.
4. Pull the hood open until it is supported by
the cables.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 6000 V8 engine here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-29 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
on page 5-26.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter and Air Filter Restriction
Indicator (If Equipped). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-18.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
F. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-21.
G. Fan. See Cooling System on page 5-29.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See Jump
Starting on page 5-39.
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View). See
Power Steering Fluid on page 5-33.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-39.
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-35.
L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-107.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38.
Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), it means you need to
check your engine oil level right away. For more
information, see CHECK OIL LEVEL under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-47.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-13
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-112.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-14
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-15
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that
an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
has GM-trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-16
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, reset
the system.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, see
“Engine Oil Life System” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-44 for vehicles equipped with the
DIC, or do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for
10 seconds, the system is resetting.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still does
not reset, see your dealer for service.
5-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter and
the air filter restriction
indicator (if equipped).
When to Inspect
Notice: If you spray water into the engine air
cleaner/filter intake and water enters the engine air
cleaner/filter housing, as shown in the illustration,
you could damage your vehicle’s engine. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
spray water into the engine air cleaner/filter intake
and/or housing.
5-18
If your vehicle is equipped with an air filter restriction
indicator, it lets you know when the engine air
cleaner/filter needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a
restriction indicator, you should inspect the air filter
restriction indicator at every oil change and replace the
engine air cleaner/filter when the indicator tells you
to. On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
you should inspect the air cleaner/filter at every oil
change and replace it at the first oil change after
100,000 miles (160 000 km). See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
How to Inspect
Vehicles with an Air Filter
Restriction Indicator
Inspecting the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter and Resetting the
Air Filter Restriction Indicator
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air
duct. When the indicator turns black or is in the
red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and reset
the indicator. See “Replacing the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Indicator” later in this section for further instructions.
Vehicles without an Air Filter
Restriction Indicator
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove it from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter remains caked
with dirt, a new filter is required. See “Replacing
the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter and Resetting the Air
Filter Restriction Indicator” later in this section for
further instructions.
1. Loosen the screws on the engine air
cleaner/filter cover.
5-19
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if equipped,
by pressing the top button on the indicator.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the air filter
restriction indicator, refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine when to replace the engine
air cleaner/filter. See Owner Checks and Services
on page 6-9.
{CAUTION:
2. Lift the cover upward and set it aside.
3. Pull the air cleaner/filter up and out from the air
cleaner housing. Care should be taken to dislodge
as little dirt as possible.
4. Clean the air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and
the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
5-20
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
5-21
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle
has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine
off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the
engine run at idle for five minutes if outside
temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder
than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle the engine
longer. Should the fluid level be low during this cold
check, you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid.
Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle with this graphic is
located at the rear of
the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
5-22
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Do not overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Notice: Use of automatic transmission fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transmission fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check,” earlier in
this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-23
Engine Coolant
What to Use
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-24
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is
located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark.
If your vehicle is equipped with the LOW COOLANT
LEVEL message and it comes on and stays on, it means
you are low on engine coolant.
See “Low Coolant Level” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-47.
5-25
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-35.
In addition, you will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT,
ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
on the instrument panel. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-47.
5-26
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-28 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-28 for
information on driving to a safe place in
an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant condition,
can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-68.
5-27
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
2. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving — DRIVE (D).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-28
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In
this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
5-29
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-28 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.
5-30
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
1. Locate the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap that has this label.
2. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, are no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap
slowly counterclockwise (left) about one full turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
3. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-31
4. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark.
5. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
6. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
5-32
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Locate the cap with this
symbol. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
power steering fluid reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
5-33
What to Use
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message that
comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is
displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition
cycle if the fluid is low. When the LOW WASHER FLUID
message is displayed, you will need to add washer
fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-34
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of
the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-35
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it
is not, have your brake
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
5-36
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they will have to be
replaced. Do not let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-92.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-37
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
battery location.
5-38
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-39 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-89.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save your radio!
5-39
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use these
remote terminals instead of the terminals on
the battery.
The remote positive (+)
terminal is located near the
engine accessory drive
bracket. On some vehicles,
the terminal may be
covered by a red plastic
cover. To access the
remote positive (+)
terminal, open the cover.
5-40
The remote negative (−)
terminal is located on
the engine accessory
drive bracket and is
marked GND.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the
remote terminals.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive terminal (+) if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal, if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-41
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) terminal
is marked GND.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
5-42
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
How to Check Lubricant
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to its
original position.
All-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
A. Filler Plug
B. Drain Plug
1. Remove the filler plug (A). The fluid level should be
just below the bottom of the filler plug hole. To get
an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
2. Add fluid if necessary.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
3. Reinstall the filler plug. Use care not to overtighten
the filler plug.
5-43
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
When the differential is cold, the proper level is from
5/8 inch to 1-5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to
reach the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-44
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Bulb Replacement
See Replacement Bulbs on page 5-52 for the proper
type of bulb to use.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When the differential is cold, the proper level is from
about 1/4 inch (6 mm) to about 3/8 inch (10 mm) below
the filler plug hole.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the
bulb package.
5-45
Headlamps
4. Unplug the electrical
connector.
1. Open the hood as described earlier under Hood
Release on page 5-10 and locate the affected
headlamp on the inner front portion of the hood.
2. Turn the bulb/socket
retainer
counterclockwise to
unlock the bulb/socket.
You may prefer to
unplug the electrical
connector before
removing the
bulb/socket. If so,
complete Step 4 before
doing this step.
3. Pull the bulb/socket
straight out from the
headlamp housing.
5. Push the new bulb/socket into the headlamp
assembly making sure to align the splines on
the bulb/socket with the splines in the headlamp
housing. Use care not to touch the bulb with
your fingers or hands.
6. Turn the bulb/socket retainer clockwise to lock the
bulb/socket in place.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
5-46
Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps
1. Open the hood as described earlier under
Hood Release on page 5-10 and locate the
affected lamp.
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and
remove it from the
lamp housing.
Daytime Running Lamps
1. Locate the lamp
assembly behind the
front bumper. It is
easiest to come in from
the side of the
vehicle through the
wheel opening.
3. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.
4. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Put the bulb socket into the lamp housing and turn
it clockwise until it locks.
5-47
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and
remove it from the
lamp housing.
Roof Marker Lamps
Corner Roof Marker Lamps
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket.
4. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Put the bulb socket into the lamp housing and turn
it clockwise until it locks.
1. Remove the screw and lift off the lens.
5-48
Center Roof Marker Lamps
2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it and
remove the old bulb.
1. Push in on the notch with a flat tool and pull the
lamp out.
3. Put a new bulb into the socket.
4. Reinstall the socket into the lens and turn it
clockwise to lock it into place.
5. Hook the side of the lens with the hook end in the
notch first and then tighten the screw.
5-49
Taillamps
A. Stoplamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-Up Lamp
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp housing.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket.
4. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Place the hook end of the lamp in place on one
side and push the other end of the lamp down
until it locks in place.
5-50
1. Open the liftgate or tailgate.
2. Remove the two
screws from the rear
lamp assembly
and remove the rear
lamp assembly.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight
out from the socket.
5. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert it into the
taillamp housing and turn the socket
counterclockwise until it is locked in place.
6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten
the screws.
Your vehicle may have a taillamp in the bumper. To
replace it, do the following:
5-51
1. Locate the affected
taillamp which is
behind and under
the bumper.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp housing.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket.
4. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Put the bulb socket into the lamp housing and turn
it clockwise to lock it.
5-52
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamp
Low-Beam and High-Beam
Headlamps
Rear Taillamp and Stoplamp
Rear Taillamp in Bumper
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Roof Marker Lamp
Bulb Number
3156
4114K
4157K or 3157KX
9007
3057
3057
3156
168
For replacement bulbs not listed here, please consult
your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do
the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-53
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
5-54
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-58.
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-64.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
5-55
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can
be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-58.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
5-56
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used as a single. For information
on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-58.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of a
tire size.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the
light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. The
load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
5-57
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
5-58
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to
279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
5-59
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-63.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-64.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-58.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-58.
5-60
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-58. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
When to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Check your tires once a month or more.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are
cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-63 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-66 for more information.
5-61
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-58 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60,
for more information. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-112.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the spare tire in your tire rotation.
5-62
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-70.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. For examples of these labels and their
location on your vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-58.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
General Motors recommends that you get tires with that
same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,
ride and other things during normal service on your
vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud
and snow).
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-63
If you replace your tires with those not having a TPC
Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load
range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
{CAUTION:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires) the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels.
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
{CAUTION:
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-64
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
one way or the other, the alignment may need to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to
be rebalanced.
5-65
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for
more information.
5-66
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may have an accessory inflator system.
You can inflate things like basketballs and bicycle tires.
You can also use it to bring your tire pressure up to
the proper pressure. The engine must be running and
the gearshift lever must be in PARK (P) for the inflator
to operate.
The accessory inflator is
located in the rear
compartment on the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class U-type
chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install
them on the rear axle tires and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened.
Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
5-67
The accessory inflator kit
is located in the spare tire
cover pocket. The kit
includes a hose and three
nozzle adapters.
To use the accessory inflator, do the following:
1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end of
the hose.
2. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish
to inflate.
3. Remove the dust cover and attach the hose to
the outlet.
The accessory inflator hose also has a built-in
air pressure gage. As soon as you start to
inflate an object it will automatically read the
current pressure.
4. Press and release the switch to turn the accessory
inflator on. The indicator light will remain on while
the inflator is running.
When you are finished using the inflator, press and
release the switch to turn it off. Place the inflator kit tools
and the hose in the pouch and store it back in the
spare tire cover pocket.
5-68
If your vehicle is equipped with the air suspension
system, load leveling will not function with the inflator
hose attached to the inflator outlet.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions,
and inflate any object only to its
recommended pressure.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
(Continued)
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear—not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION:
5-70
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you can put blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as
a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Removing the Tools
SUV
The equipment you’ll need is behind and to the side of
the driver’s side second row seat. To remove the
equipment, do the following:
1. Fold the driver’s side second row seat down.
See 60/40 Split Bench Seat on page 1-7 for
more information.
2. Turn the wingnut (A)
counterclockwise to
release the jack.
The following steps will tell you next how to use the jack
and change a tire.
3. Turn the wingnut (B), which holds the jack tool kit,
counterclockwise to release it.
5-71
4. Open the tool bag and you will find the following
tools which you will use to remove the spare tire
and flat tire:
SUT
The equipment you’ll need is the rear cargo
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
Unlock the cover and pull it off.
A. Jack Handle
B. Jack Handle
Extension (Used
for Rear
Flats Only)
5-72
C. Wheel Wrench
D. Ratchet
E. Spanner Wrench
Once removed, you will see the following tire
changing equipment:
You will first need to remove the tool kit/first aid kit
to allow you enough room to remove the tire
changing equipment.
A. Tool Bag
B. Jack
C. Jack Wing Nut
D. Wheel Blocks
Wing Nut
E. Wheel Blocks
To remove the equipment, do the following:
1. Unscrew the wingnut holding the wheel blocks and
remove them.
2. Unscrew the wingnut holding the jack and
remove it.
5-73
4. Open the tool bag and you will find the following
tools which you will use to remove the spare tire
and change a flat tire:
3. Pull the tool bag up and out from the front
retention clip.
A. Jack Handle
B. Jack Handle
Extension (Used
for Rear
Flats Only)
5-74
C. Wheel Wrench
D. Ratchet
Removing the Inside-Mounted
Spare Tire
1. Remove the wheel blocks from the tire retainer
plate by turning the wingnut counterclockwise.
The spare tire and wheel blocks are stored in the rear
cargo area. You will need to remove the tire cover to get
to them.
2. Place the flat end of the wheel wrench through the
hole in the spanner wrench.
A. Spare or Flat Tire
B. Receiver Extension (If Equipped) Not used for tire
changing procedure. See “Receiver Extension” under
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-52.
C. Tire Retainer Plate
D. Nut
E. Wheel Blocks
5-75
3. Place the end of the
spanner wrench on the
nut and then turn
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to
loosen the nut
holding the tire to
the carrier.
The tools you’ll be using to finish changing a flat tire are
the following:
4. Pull off the tire retainer plate and set it aside.
Remove the spare tire from the wheel carrier.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-76
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Jack Handle
D. Jack Handle
Extension
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Ratchet
Before proceeding, be sure to set the wheel blocks at
the appropriate tires as shown previously.
Removing the
Spare-Tire-Carrier-Mounted Spare Tire
The outside-mounted spare tire is attached to the
tire carrier. To remove the spare tire, do the following:
1. Open the tire carrier. See Tailgate (SUT) on
page 2-16 for tire carrier operation.
3. Pull off the license plate holder from the spare tire.
4. Slide the ratchet onto the wheel wrench with the
DOWN mark facing you.
2. Unscrew the wingnut on the back of the tire carrier.
5-77
The tools you’ll be using to finish changing a flat tire
include the following:
5. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to loosen the
wheel nuts.
6. Remove the three wheel nuts holding the spare tire
onto the tire carrier.
7. Pull off and gently lower the spare tire to the
ground. Set it next to the flat tire.
5-78
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Jack Handle
D. Jack Handle
Extension
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Ratchet
Before proceeding, be sure to set the wheel blocks at
the appropriate tires as shown previously.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. To remove the center
cap, place the flat end
of the wheel wrench
in the slot on the wheel
and gently pry the
center cap out.
2. Slide the ratchet onto the wheel wrench with the
DOWN mark facing you.
3. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to loosen the
wheel nuts. Don’t remove them yet.
You will now need to jack the vehicle up using the
instructions following.
5-79
4. Assemble the jack and tools as follows:
Front Flat Tire: Attach the jack handle with the
hook end connected to the u-hook/clevis on
the jack. Slide the ratchet onto the jack handle with
the UP mark facing you.
5-80
Rear Flat Tire: Assemble the jack together with the
jack handle and the jack handle extension. Press
the retention clip on the jack handle extension
(arrow) so it engages into the jack handle. Slide the
ratchet onto the jack handle extension with the
UP mark facing you.
5. Turn the ratchet clockwise to raise the jack head to
the lifting point.
Front Flat Tire: Position
the jack under the vehicle
on the frame behind
the flat tire where the
frame sections overlap.
See the graphic following
for an approximate
measurement of the jack
location on the frame.
Front Flat Tire
X = 28.5 inches (72.0 cm)
5-81
Rear Flat Tire: Place the
jack under the curved rear
axle pad. Make sure
the jack head is positioned
so that the rear axle
pad is resting securely on
the jack head.
Rear Flat Tire
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
5-82
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
6. Turn the ratchet clockwise to raise the vehicle.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so
there is enough room for the spare tire to clear
the ground.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
7. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-83
9. After mounting the
spare, put the wheel
nuts back on with
the rounded end of
the nuts toward
the wheel.
10. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the nuts, with
the UP mark facing you, clockwise until the wheel is
held against the hub.
You will not be tightening the nuts fully yet.
5-84
{CAUTION:
Front Position
Rear Position
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchet
counterclockwise, with the DOWN mark facing you.
Then lower the jack completely.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-112 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-112 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
5-85
12. Tighten the nuts firmly
in a crisscross
sequence as shown by
turning the ratchet
clockwise, with the UP
mark facing you.
13. When you install the wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on
the wheel and tap it into place until it sits flush
with the wheel.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
Inside-Mounted Tire
Use the art and text following to help you store the
spare or flat tire back into its proper spot when you
are done.
Store the flat or spare tire back inside the vehicle on the
spare tire mount.
5-86
A. Spare or Flat Tire
B. Receiver Extension
(If Equipped)
C. Tire Retainer Plate
D. Nut
E. Wheel Blocks
To store the flat or spare tire on the spare tire mount,
do the following:
1. Slide the flat or spare tire onto the tire carrier.
2. Slide the tire retainer plate into the wheel opening.
Be sure that the stud attached to the tire carrier
passes through the hole in the tire retainer plate.
3. Tighten the nut by hand until the tire retainer plate
is snug against the tire.
4. Use the wheel wrench
and spanner to tighten
the nut firmly. Try to
move the tire back and
forth slightly to be
sure it is secure.
Spare-Tire-Carrier-Mounted Tire
To store the flat or spare tire on the tire carrier, do
the following:
1. Close the tire carrier. See Tailgate (SUT) on
page 2-16 for tire carrier operation.
2. Place the flat or spare tire onto the tire carrier with
the outside of the wheel facing you.
3. Reinstall the three nuts holding spare or flat tire to
the tire carrier. Tighten the nuts by hand.
5. Reattach the wheel blocks to the tire retainer plate
and tighten the wing nut.
6. Reinstall the tire cover onto the spare or flat tire.
4. Use the ratchet and wheel wrench to tighten the
nuts firmly. Try to move the tire back and forth
slightly to be sure it is secure.
5-87
Storing the Tools
SUV
Follow these instructions to store the jack and tools:
1. Lower the jack completely.
2. Place the jack in the mounting bracket.
3. Tighten the wingnut (A)
until the jack is
securely fastened.
5. Slide the license plate holder onto the spare or flat
tire. Secure it from the back of the tire carrier with
the wing nut.
If you choose not to reinstall the spare or flat tire on
the vehicle, you will still need to reinstall the
license plate holder on the spare tire carrier.
5-88
4. Place the tools in the bag.
5. Slide the securing clip over the bag and secure the
bag to the floor by tightening the wingnut (B) to the
stud coming out of the floor.
In order to reduce the potential of the jack
squeaking or rattling, you will need to preload the
jack so it fits tightly in the mounting bracket.
To do this, turn the u-hook/clevis at the top of the
jack clockwise until the jack is held tight in the
mounting bracket.
SUT
Follow these instructions to store the jack and tools:
1. Lower the jack completely.
3. Tighten the wingnut (C) until the jack is
securely fastened.
In order to reduce the potential of the jack
squeaking or rattling, you will need to preload the
jack so it fits tightly in the mounting bracket.
To do this, turn the u-hook/clevis at the top of the
jack clockwise until the jack is held tight in the
mounting bracket.
4. Place the wheel blocks (E) onto the mounting stud
and tighten the wingnut (D) to secure them.
5. Place the tools in the tool bag (A), roll the bag
together tightly and neatly and then close it with
the hook and loop fasteners.
If you do not roll the tool bag tightly and neatly, you
will have trouble getting it back into the storage
retention clips in the next step.
2. Place the jack (B) in the mounting bracket in the
rear cargo compartment.
5-89
7. Push the front of the tool bag down into the front
retention clip.
6. Slide the tool bag into the rear retention clip. It may
help to twist the tool bag as you slide it into the rear
retention clip.
5-90
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-58
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-70 and Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire on page 5-79.
8. Replace the jack cover. Be sure the tabs on the
back of the jack cover fit into the slots on the
cargo box before closing the jack cover.
9. Close the spare tire carrier to ensure it securely
latches. See Tailgate (SUT) on page 2-16 for tire
carrier operation.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires—those originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tires was developed for use on your
vehicle, so it’s all right to drive on it.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and
type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
5-91
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in a closed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
Here are some cleaning tips:
•
•
•
•
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
5-92
Most stains can be removed with club soda water. To
clean, use the following instructions:
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white
cloth. Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not
drip water.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area to
make sure the cleaner does not affect the color of
the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with
the club soda water instructions given earlier in
this section.
5-93
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Leather
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of
baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Let dry.
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
Instrument Panel
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This
may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
5-94
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Wood Panels
Care of Safety Belts
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-100.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-95
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-100.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
The overall height, width, and underbody clearances of
the HUMMER H2 are similar to current General
Motors’ full-size light duty trucks. This means a
HUMMER H2 should fit in a standard car wash. But, if
your vehicle has added accessories like roof-mounted
lamps or a roof basket, it might not fit properly in a
standard car wash.
5-96
Notice: Certain add-on accessories can change the
dimensions of your vehicle. If you’ve added items
to the outside of your vehicle, it might not fit
properly in a standard car wash. Your vehicle and
the car wash could be damaged. To help prevent
damage, know how accessories have changed the
dimensions of your vehicle and check with the
car wash manager before entering a car wash.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for any roof-mounted accessories (such
as off-road lamps or a roof basket) on your vehicle,
you can damage your vehicle. To avoid damaging
your vehicle in a car wash, remove any
roof-mounted accessories if you can, and do not
use an automatic car wash while roof-mounted
accessories are on your vehicle. See Power Winch
Platform on page 4-57 and Off-Road Lamps on
page 3-16 for more information.
Also see Luggage Carrier on page 2-55 for
more information.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-96.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-100.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered
whenever possible.
5-97
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-98
Aluminum Wheels
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-99
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
5-100
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery, and
convertible tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
Foaming Tire Shine
protects in one step. No
Low Gloss
wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
Spot Lifter
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label, you will find the following:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-101
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.
5-102
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access
door is located on the
driver’s side edge of the
instrument panel. Pull
off the cover to access the
fuse block.
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold
the end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse
block access door. These can be used to replace a bad
fuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
5-103
Fuses
Usage
RR Wiper
Rear Window Wiper Switch
SEO ACCY
Special Equipment
Option Accessory
WS WPR
Windshield Wipers
5-104
Fuses
Usage
TBC ACCY
Truck Body Controller
Accessory
IGN 3
Rear Heated Seats Module
4WD
Four-Wheel Drive Switch, Air
Suspension Switch/Module
HTR A/C
Not Used
LOCK
Power Door Lock Relay
(Lock Function)
HVAC 1
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Climate Control System
L DOOR
Driver’s Door Harness
Connection
CRUISE
Cruise Control
UNLOCK
Power Door Lock Relay
(Unlock Function)
RR FOG LP
Not Used
BRAKE
Brake Switch
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Power Door Lock
Relay (Driver’s Door
Unlock Function)
BODY
Harness Connector
DRIVER UNLOCK
DDM
Driver Door Module
IGN 0
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock, Powertrain Control
Module, Transmission
LOCKS
Rear Doors and Liftgate
Power Lock Relay Feed
ECC
Liftgate
TBC IGN 0
Truck Body Controller
TBC 2C
Truck Body Controller
VEH CHMSL
Vehicle and Trailer High
Mounted Stoplamp
FLASH
Flasher Module
LT TRLR ST/TRN
Left Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
CB LT DOORS
LT TRN
Left Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Left Rear Power Window
Circuit Breaker and Driver
Door Module
TBC 2B
Truck Body Controller
VEH STOP
Vehicle Stoplamps, Brake
Module, Electronic Throttle
Control Module
TBC 2A
Truck Body Controller
RT TRLR ST/TRN
Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
RT TRN
Right Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Circuit Breaker Usage
AUX PWR 2 Midgate Controller (SUT Only)
5-105
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Device
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
SEO
TRAILER
UPFIT
SL RIDE
HDLR 2
BODY
DEFOG
HDLNR 1
SPARE RELAY
CB SEAT
CB RT DOOR
SPARE
INFO
5-106
Usage
Special Equipment
Option/Off-road Lamps
Harness Connector
Trailer Brake Wiring
Upfitter (Not Used)
Ride Control (Not Used)
Headliner Wiring Connector 2
Body Wiring Connector
Rear Defogger Relay
Headliner Wiring Connector 1
Not Used
Driver and Passenger Seat
Module Circuit Breaker
Rear Right Power Window,
Passenger Door Module
Not Used
Not Used
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the
battery. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor,
hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on its location.
5-107
5-108
Fuses
Usage
GLOW PLUG
Not Used
Fuses
Usage
LBEC 1
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Left Doors, Truck Body
Controller, Flasher Module
CUST FEED
Gasoline Accessory Power
HYBRID
Hybrid
TRL PARK
Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
STUD #1
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring
RR PARK
Right Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
MBEC 1
Mid Bussed Electrical Center
Power Feed, Front Seats,
Right Doors
LR PARK
Left Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
BLOWER
Front Climate Control Fan
PARK LP
Parking Lamps Relay
STRTR
Starter Relay
INTPARK
Roof Marker Lamps
LBEC 2
Left Bussed Electrical
Center, Door Modules, Door
Locks, Auxiliary Power
Outlet—Rear Cargo Area
and Instrument Panel
STOP LP
Stoplamps
TBC BATT
STUD #2
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Brake Feed
Truck Body Controller
Battery Feed
S/ROOF
Sunroof
ABS
Anti-Lock Brakes
SEO B2
Off-Road Lamps
VSES/ECAS
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension
4WS
Vent Solenoid Canister
IGN A
Ignition Switch
RR HVAC
Not Used
IGN B
Ignition Switch
5-109
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Instrument Panel Outlets,
Rear Cargo Area Power
Outlets, Console
02A
Oxygen Sensors
AUX PWR
B/U LP
Back-up Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
IGN 1
PCM Ignition
PCM 1
Powertrain Control Module
RR DEFOG
Rear Window Defogger
ETC/ECM
Electronic Throttle Control,
Electronic Brake Controller
HDLP-HI
Headlamp High Beam Relay
PRIME
Not Used
INJ 1
Ignition Coil, Fuel
Injectors-Bank 1
O2B
Oxygen Sensors
INJ 2
Ignition Coil, Fuel
Injectors-Bank 2
AIRBAG
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System
FRT PARK
Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
IGN E
Instrument Panel Cluster, Air
Conditioning Relay, Turn
Signal/Hazard Switch, Starter
Relay, Electronic Brake
Controller TC2 Mode Switch
DRL
Daytime Running
Lamps (Relay)
Electronic Brake Controller
Battery Feed
SEO IGN
Rear Defog Relay
RTD
TBC IGN1
Truck Body Controller Ignition
TRL B/U
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
HI HDLP-LT
High Beam Headlamp-Left
PCM B
Powertrain Control Module,
Fuel Pump
LH HID
Not Used
F/PMP
Fuel Pump (Relay)
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
RVC
Regulated Voltage Control
5-110
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Instrument Panel
Cluster/Driver Information
Center
CRNK
Starting System
IPC/DIC
LO HDLP-RT
Headlamp Low Beam-Right
Climate Control
Controller/Electronically
Controlled Air Suspension
FOG LP
Not Used
HVAC/ECAS
FOG LP
Not Used
CIG LTR
Cigarette Lighter
HORN
Horn Relay
HI HDLP-RT
High Beam Headlamp-Right
W/S WASH
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump Relay
HDLP-LOW
Headlamp Low Beam Relay
W/S WASH
A/C COMP
Air Conditioning
Compressor Relay
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump
INFO
OnStar
A/C COMP
Air Conditioning Compressor
RADIO AMP
Radio Amplifier
RR WPR
Rear Wiper/Washer
RH HID
Not Used
RADIO
Audio System
HORN
Horn
SEO B1
Mid Bussed Electrical
Center, HomeLink, Rear
Heated Seats
EAP
Not Used
TREC
All-Wheel Drive Module
LO HDLP-LT
Headlamp Low Beam-Left
SBA
Not Used
BTSI
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System
5-111
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric. Please refer to Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
1.6 lbs
0.7 kg
Cooling System
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See Cooling
System on page 5-29.
13.0 quarts
12.7 L
Engine Oil with Filter
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine
oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating range. See
Engine Oil on page 5-13.
6.0 quarts
5.7 L
32.0 gallons
121.0 L
140 ft lb
190 Y
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R-134a
Fuel Tank
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in
this manual.
Engine Specifications
5-112
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 6000 V8
U
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-58.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-16.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that
service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600
miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over
a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer has
GM-trained service technicians who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light appears, certain
services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL light comes on within 10 months since
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on 10 months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission
Control Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
For vehicles driven in dusty/dirty conditions: Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If
necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. An
Emission Control Service. See footnote †.
•
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-54.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
Change transfer case fluid.
See footnote (g).
•
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
An Emission
Control Service.
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
•
6-6
•
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or
every 5 years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service.
•
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage and parking
brake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated
unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,
or they could be damaged.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots and axle seals for leaks.
6-7
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
SUT spare tire carrier hinge: Inspect for leaks and
lubricate if required. Remove the setscrew at the hinge
casting and add lubricant, moving the hinge back
and forth periodically, until lubricant can be seen coming
from the setscrew opening. Install setscrew and
tighten to 7 ft lb (9 Y). See Recommended fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for what lubricant to use.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air
bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot
points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate
handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo
door hinge, locks and folding seat hardware. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
6-8
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for
further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-54 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire. If
it moves, tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-70.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-36
if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-10
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-36 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealer
for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service
is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service
is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained
from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench
Engine Oil
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only
Engine Coolant water
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
6-12
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
Power Steering GM
No.
U.S.
89021184, in Canada
System
89021186).
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
Chassis
88901242) or lubricant meeting
Lubrication
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Lubricant, Superlube
SUT Spare Tire Multi-Purpose
Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Carrier Hinge (GM
Canada 10953474).
Automatic
Transmission
Usage
Front and
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
Usage
Hood Hinges
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades
Front – 17.0 inches (43.0 cm)
Rear – 11.0 inches (28.0 cm)
GM Part Number
88944151
88984215
12571164
ACDelco® Part Number
—
PF46
41–985
15706394
15174476
—
—
6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
(A) Air Conditioning Compressor
6-14
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ........................................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to HUMMER. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the HUMMER Consumer Relations Manager by calling
1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), Customer Assistance
prompt. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer
Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top
left of the instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.)
When contacting HUMMER, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800- 955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
HUMMER has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with HUMMER by dialing: 1-800-833-6537. (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
HUMMER encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to HUMMER, the letter should be addressed to
HUMMER’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
HUMMER Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33171
Detroit, MI 48232-5177
1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376)
1-800-833-6537 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment that
may be required for your
vehicle, such as hand
controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new HUMMER vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the HUMMER Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide peace of mind as you drive in the
city or travel the open road. Call 1–866–HUMMER6
(486–6376) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to speak
with a HUMMER Roadside Assistance Representative.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident.
7-6
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service Directions to the nearest
dealer.
• Trip Routing: A Roadside Assistance
Representative can provide specific information
regarding this feature.
• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: A Roadside
Assistance Representative can provide specific
information regarding this feature.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under HUMMER’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number.
•
•
•
•
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Telephone number of your location.
Location of the vehicle.
Courtesy Transportation
Model, year, color, and license plate number
HUMMER has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and
delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you and
your family. Remember, we are only a phone call away.
HUMMER Roadside Assistance: 1-866-HUMMER6
(486-6376), text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
HUMMER reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
HUMMER’s judgement, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HUMMER reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
7-7
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, HUMMER helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service
to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes a one way or round trip
shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the
dealership.
7-8
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five days maximum) may be available
for the use of public transportation such as taxi or
bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses (five day maximum) may be
available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you
obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $40 a
day and must be supported by receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet
state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You
are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components to
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bag
deployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock
braking and to help the driver control the vehicle
in difficult driving situations. Some information may be
stored during regular operations to facilitate repair
of detected malfunctions; other information is stored only
in a crash event by computer systems, such as those
commonly called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Air
Bag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your
vehicle may record information about the condition of
the vehicle and how it was operated, such as data
related to engine speed, brake application, throttle
position, vehicle speed, safety belt usage, air bag
readiness, air bag performance, and the severity of a
collision. This information has been used to improve
vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and driving
safety. Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes,
these on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
Reporting Safety Defects
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), or write:
HUMMER Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33177
Detroit, MI 48232-5177
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
7-11
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
7-12
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessory Inflator ........................................... 5-67
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-18
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-69
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-102
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-19
Air Suspension ............................................... 4-66
Airbag
Off Light ..................................................... 3-30
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-29
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-58
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-69
Airbag Off Switch ........................................ 1-65
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-63
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-68
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-63
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-64
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-61
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-60
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-43
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-32
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-92
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-34
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-92
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-98
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-95
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-99
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-97
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-92
Finish Care ................................................. 5-97
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-99
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-95
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-94
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-94
Leather ...................................................... 5-94
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-99
Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-95
Tires .......................................................... 5-99
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-99
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-100
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-94
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-96
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-95
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-98
Wood Panels .............................................. 5-95
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-18
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-60
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-89
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-91
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-92
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-92
Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-92
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-92
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Navigation/Radio System ..............................
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-87
3-61
3-74
3-87
3-61
3-89
3-90
3-15
5-21
2-28
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-38
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-17
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-45
Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ................................... 1-7
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-36
System Warning Light .................................. 3-32
Brakes .......................................................... 5-35
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-25
2
Bulb Replacement ...........................................
Daytime Running Lamps ...............................
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps .............
Halogen Bulbs ............................................
Headlamps .................................................
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Roof Marker Lamps .....................................
Taillamps ....................................................
Buying New Tires ...........................................
5-45
5-47
5-47
5-45
5-46
5-52
5-48
5-50
5-63
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-112
Carbon Monoxide ... 2-13, 2-14, 2-16, 2-39, 4-48, 4-68
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-95
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-91
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-92
Your CDs ................................................... 3-92
Cargo Area, All-Weather .................................. 2-59
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-59
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-55
Center Overhead Console ................................ 2-54
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-67
Charging System Light .................................... 3-31
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-37
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................... 5-9
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-99
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-42
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-39
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-49
Older Children ............................................. 1-36
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position .................................................. 1-52
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ........................................... 1-54
Top Strap ................................................... 1-46
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-47
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-45
Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-92
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-18
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-98
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-97
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-92
Finish Care ................................................. 5-97
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-95
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-94
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-94
Leather ...................................................... 5-94
Cleaning (cont.)
Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-95
Tires .......................................................... 5-99
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-99
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-94
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-96
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-95
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-98
Wood Panels .............................................. 5-95
Climate Control System
Climate Controls Personalization .................... 3-25
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-19
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-25
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-33
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-22
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-35
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-27
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26
Cooling System .............................................. 5-29
Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-41
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................... 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-17
Door
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-22
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-43
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-44
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-54
4
Driver Information Center (DIC) (cont.)
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-47
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-39
City ........................................................... 4-43
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
First Aid and Tool Kit ................................... 4-55
Freeway ..................................................... 4-44
Front Mounted Receiver ............................... 4-56
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-46
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-40
Off-Road .................................................... 4-16
Power Winch Platform .................................. 4-57
Recovery Loops .......................................... 4-53
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-53
Winter ........................................................ 4-48
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-19
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment .....................................
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block .............
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .........................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .......................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ....
Underhood Fuse Block ...............................
Windshield Wiper Fuses .............................
5-102
5-106
5-103
5-103
5-102
5-107
5-102
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System .... 4-66
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18
Battery ....................................................... 5-38
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-37
Coolant ...................................................... 5-24
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-27
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-35
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-39
Oil ............................................................. 5-13
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-28
Overheating ................................................ 5-26
Starting ...................................................... 2-26
Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-17
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-35
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ......................................
Finish Damage ...............................................
First Aid Kit ....................................................
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................
5-18
5-99
4-55
3-92
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-69
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-70
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-86
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-21
Power Steering ........................................... 5-33
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-34
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-44
Front Mounted Receiver ................................... 4-56
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-42
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-43
Fuses
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-106
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-103
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-103
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-107
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-102
5
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-35
Fuel .......................................................... 3-42
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-40
Speedometer .............................................. 3-28
Tachometer ................................................. 3-28
Transmission Temperature ............................. 3-35
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-32
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-50
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-54
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Headlamps .................................................... 5-46
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-15
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-45
Daytime Running Lamps ....................... 3-14, 5-47
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-47
6
Headlamps (cont.)
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-45
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-48
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heater ........................................................... 3-19
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-41
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-46
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-46
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-50
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-51
Hood
Checking Things Under .................................. 5-9
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-22
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-25
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-39
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-60
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-16
Cluster ....................................................... 3-27
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-39
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall ....................................
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Dome ........................................................
Exterior ......................................................
Off-Road ....................................................
Reading .....................................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
Liftgate ..........................................................
Light
Airbag Off ..................................................
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
5-55
3-17
3-17
3-13
3-16
3-17
1-49
1-51
2-13
3-30
3-29
3-34
Light (cont.)
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-32
Charging System ......................................... 3-31
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-41
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-41
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-43
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-37
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-28
Security ..................................................... 3-41
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-42
Traction Off ................................................ 3-34
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-17
Locking Rear Axle ........................................... 4-10
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13
Locks
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-43
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-55
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
7
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-37
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-63
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-47
Midgate ......................................................... 2-14
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-43
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-41
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb
View Assist ............................................. 2-48
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-47
8
Mirrors (cont.)
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-47
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-46
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
Navigation/Radio System .................................. 3-87
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-25
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-28
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-16
Off-Road Lamps ............................................. 3-16
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-40
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-36
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-48
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-25
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View
Assist ..................................................... 2-48
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-47
Outside (cont.)
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-47
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-46
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-28
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-37
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-38
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-36
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-38
Passing ......................................................... 4-13
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-24
Personalization, Climate Controls ...................... 3-25
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-18
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ....................................... 5-102
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-26
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-33
Windows .................................................... 2-19
Power Winch Platform ..................................... 4-57
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-51
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-21
R
Radios .......................................................... 3-60
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-91
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-92
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-92
Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-87
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-61
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-74
Rear Seat Audio .......................................... 3-87
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-61
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-89
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-90
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-17
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-44
Locking ...................................................... 4-10
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Heated Seats ........................................... 1-7
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-33
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-59
9
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................... 3-87
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-30
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-43
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature Display ..... 2-41
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recovery Loops .............................................. 4-53
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-64
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-71
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-52
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-69
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash ..................................................... 1-70
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-69
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-70
10
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-26
Ride Height, Selectable Extended Rear Ride ...... 4-65
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-30
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-53
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-40
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-28
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-95
Driver Position ............................................ 1-22
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-22
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-21
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-33
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-30
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-30
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-35
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-29
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-16
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
60/40 Split Bench Seat .................................. 1-7
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Heated Seats, Rear ....................................... 1-7
Memory ..................................................... 2-63
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
Third Row Seat ........................................... 1-10
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-51
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-52
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-54
Security Light ................................................. 3-41
Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height ............... 4-65
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-37
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-68
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-61
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-99
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-37
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-38
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-91
Installing .................................................... 5-79
Spare Tire (cont.)
Removing ................................................... 5-71
Storing ....................................................... 5-86
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-112
Speedometer .................................................. 3-28
Split Bench Seat (60/40) .................................... 1-7
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-26
Steering ........................................................ 4-11
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-89
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
All-Weather Cargo Area ................................ 2-59
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-55
Center Overhead Console ............................. 2-54
Glove Box .................................................. 2-54
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-55
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-59
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-52
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-22
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-62
Suspension .................................................... 4-66
T
Tachometer ....................................................
Tailgate .........................................................
Taillamps .......................................................
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .....................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ...................................
3-28
2-16
5-50
3-89
2-22
11
Theft-Deterrent Systems (cont.)
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-22
Passlock® ................................................... 2-24
Third Row Seat .............................................. 1-10
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tires ............................................................. 5-54
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-98
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-63
Chains ....................................................... 5-67
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-70
Cleaning .................................................... 5-99
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-69
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-60
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-61
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-79
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-71
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-91
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-86
Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-64
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-65
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-66
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-63
Tonneau Cover ............................................... 2-61
Tool Kit ......................................................... 4-55
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-46
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-47
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-31
12
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-42
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-64
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-68
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-64
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Off Light ..................................................... 3-34
Trailer
Recommendations ....................................... 4-67
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21
Temperature Gage ....................................... 3-35
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-28
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-90
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-64
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-101
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-101
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-54
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-63
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-25
Visors ........................................................... 2-22
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-32
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-26
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-47
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-65
Replacement ............................................... 5-66
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-45
Windows ....................................................... 2-18
Power ........................................................ 2-19
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .......... 5-98
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-34
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-53
Fuses ...................................................... 5-102
Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-48
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
13
✍ NOTES
14
Download PDF

advertising